JP2020141970A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A setting value from among plural setting values having different degrees of advantage can be set, and a suggestive performance for suggesting control to an advantageous state can be executed. A special suggestive performance for reporting control to an advantageous state as a suggestive performance can be executed and an execution ratio of the special suggestive performance differs according to a set setting value. Zone display for indicating a display change high-probability zone is displayed in an upper part of an image display device and is controlled to a display change high-probability zone. In a shift to a display change high-probability zone, a display mode of specific display is changed easily. Changing timing of specific display is provided also after completion of a display change high-probability zone, and a display mode is more easily changed also after completion of a display change high-probability zone in specific display in which a display mode is changed before completion of a display change high-probability zone than in specific display in which a display mode is not changed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-4

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can be set to any of a plurality of set values that have different advantages for the player.

In some conventional game machines, one of a plurality of set values can be set, and the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the set set value. Further, among such game machines, there are those capable of performing an effect suggesting a set value (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the game entertainment cannot be improved because the suggestion of the set value is not related to the result of determination as to whether or not the setting value is controlled in an advantageous state.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the game entertainment.

The gaming machine described in means 1
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1)
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the chance-up effect) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state has executed the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-2. It is equipped with a part that executes the effect processing during variable display later).
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means can execute a special suggestion effect for notifying that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs a chance-up effect in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU). Part to be executed in -4),
The execution rate of the special suggestion effect differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (A)), the effect pattern of the chance-up effect based on the variable display result being a big hit. The part where the total of the ratio determined by the pattern CU-3 and the ratio determined by the pattern CU-4 differs according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1),
further,
A change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) that changes the display mode of the specific display.
It is provided with a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone effect of a display change high probability zone).
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. The mode is easily changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suggest the set value set in the game machine to the player by the execution ratio of the special suggestion effect that notifies that the player is controlled to the advantageous state. Can be improved. Further, since it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, the interest of the game will be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
As the special suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means can execute the first special suggestion effect and the second special suggestion effect whose production mode is different from that of the first special suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 The part where the chance-up effect can be performed with pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4),
The execution rate of the first special suggestion effect is the same regardless of the set value set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the determination rate of the pattern CU-3 is the pachinko gaming machine. The part that is 10% regardless of the set value set to 1),
The execution rate of the second special suggestion effect differs depending on the set value set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the determination rate of the pattern CU-4 is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1. (Different parts depending on the set values)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to which of the first special suggestion effect and the second special suggestion effect is executed as the special suggestion effect, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or means 2.
Further provided is a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing the predetermined effect at a different ratio according to the set set value in a predetermined period from the execution of the special suggestion effect to the establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, FIG. As shown in 9-7 and FIG. 9-8, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance-up effect on the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, it corresponds to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The part where the setting value suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect whose set value is suggested by the execution ratio is executed in the predetermined period after the special suggestion effect is executed, the game entertainment of the predetermined period can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to the means 3.
As the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect executing means can execute a special effect corresponding to the special suggestion effect and having a different effect mode from the special suggestion effect (for example, as a modification 129SG-1). As shown in 9-11, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance-up effect on the pattern CU-3, the chance-up effect can be further executed on the pattern CU-4).
By executing the special suggestion effect and the special effect within a specific period, the player can specify that the set value is a part of the plurality of set values (for example,). As shown in FIG. 9-11 as a modified example 129SG-1, the chance-up effect is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by being executed twice by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1. The part that can be specified that the set value is in the range of 4 to 6)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to whether or not some of the set values can be specified by executing the special suggestion effect and the special effect within a specific period. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to the means 3.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a special effect corresponding to the special suggestion effect as the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11 as a modification 129SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance. After the up effect is executed by pattern CU-3, the chance up effect can be further executed by pattern CU-4),
Based on the total number of times the special suggestion effect is executed and the number of times the special effect is executed within a specific period, the player determines that the set value is a part of the plurality of set values. It can be specified (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11 as a modification 129SG-1, the chance-up effect is executed twice by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1. The part where the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be specified to be in the range of 4 to 6)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to how many times the special suggestion effect and the special effect are executed within a specific period, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 5.
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means can execute a stage effect including a special stage effect which is an effect in which the effect mode changes stepwise and becomes the special suggestion effect (for example, Modification 129SG). -As shown in FIG. 9-12 as -2, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the chance-up effect),
The predetermined effect executing means is a stage effect following the special stage effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the fifth stage of the chance-up effect), and a specific set value is set. It is possible to execute the effect of the specific set value suggestion stage that suggests that (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the sixth stage of the chance-up effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the stage effect is changed to the special stage, the player can pay attention to whether or not the stage effect is further changed to the specific set value suggestion stage, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 7
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1)
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the control is controlled in the advantageous state (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-2, the variable display during effect process is performed. With the part to execute)
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect suggesting that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is high (for example, the effect control CPU 120 patterns the chance-up effect CU-2). The part that can be executed with),
The number of times the specific suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means in a predetermined period differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-13 as a modification 129SG-3, the chance-up effect is produced. Is executed three times in the pattern CU-2, it means that 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the chance-up effect is executed once in the pattern CU-2 or on the second floor. In this case, the pachinko game machine 1 is set to one of 1 to 5 as a set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the number of times the specific suggestion effect is executed, so that the interest of the suggestion effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 8
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1)
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the control is controlled in the advantageous state (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-2, the variable display during effect process is performed. With the part to execute)
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of special suggestion effects notifying that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs a chance-up effect on the pattern CU-3 or the like. Part to be executed in pattern CU-4),
The rate at which any of the special suggestion effects is executed is the same regardless of the set value set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-14 as a modification 129SG-4, the pattern CU-3 The total of the determination ratio of the pattern CU-4 and the determination ratio of the pattern CU-4 is 15% regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1),
The execution rate of any one of the special suggestion effects differs depending on the set value set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-14 as a modified example 129SG-4, with the determination rate of the pattern CU-3. The determination ratio of the pattern CU-4 differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player is suggested to the player a set value set in the game machine by the execution ratio of at least one special suggestion effect among a plurality of special suggestion effects notifying that the player is controlled in an advantageous state. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the interest of suggestive production.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 9 to 13. Conventionally, there have been proposed game machines that execute a special zone effect related to a hold display when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137126. In the case of the above-mentioned game machine, there is a possibility that the interest may deteriorate after the special zone production is completed, and the purpose is to provide a game machine with improved interest.

The gaming machine of means 9
In order to achieve the above purpose, the gaming machine according to another aspect is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, hold display, active display) corresponding to variable display.
A change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) that changes the display mode of the specific display.
It is provided with a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone effect of a display change high probability zone).
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. The mode is easily changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to the means 9.
A change suggestion effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. 12-1 (C) or the like) suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes between when the specific effect is executed and when the specific effect is not executed. The execution rate of the image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be different (for example, the change suggestion effect may be executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 9 to the means 10.
The specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in the display mode than the specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed. For example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 9 to the means 11.
A special effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a zone effect of a chance zone) different from the specific effect is provided.
The display mode of the specific display may be changed more easily when the specific effect is executed than when the special effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 9 to the means 12.
A special effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a zone effect of a chance zone) different from the specific effect is provided.
When the special effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific effect is executed.
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (see, for example, FIG. 12-7).
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), and (C) Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the received command buffer at the time of a moving prize. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect type during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the effect (reach notice) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of the effect during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during variable display as a modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion when the effect type determination table C is used. (A) is a diagram showing an effect period of the variable display effect as in the second embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, and (B) is set when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period and the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach in the third embodiment, and (B) is the figure showing the execution decision ratio of the setting suggestion. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as Example 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display as Example 4. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the fluctuation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach in the fourth embodiment, and (B) is the fluctuation pattern. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the normal reach, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion of. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as a modification 2. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 which are common to all the variation patterns in the modified example 2, and (B) is the diagram in which the variation pattern is the normal reach / super reach. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in common, (C) shows the variation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach, and the third in the set value 1 and the set value 6. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in 3 periods. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the chance up effect decision process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production pattern of the chance up production. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the chance up production. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value suggestion effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect pattern of the setting value suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the setting value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the viable period of the chance up effect and the set value suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the chance up effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the setting value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the feasible period of the chance up effect in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution stage of the step-up effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the feasible period of the chance up effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the chance up effect in the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate, the appearance rate, and the reliability of the notice X of the feature part 53AK. It is a figure which shows an example of another execution rate, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X of the feature part 53AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate and the appearance rate of the notice Y of the feature part 53AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate and the appearance rate of the notice Z of the feature part 53AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 53AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 57AK. It is a flowchart which shows the specific display process of the feature part 57AK. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the specific display processing. It is a figure which shows the change timing of the display mode of a specific display. It is a figure which shows the display change pattern of the specific display of a feature part 57AK. It is a figure which shows the transition ratio of a zone. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification of the feature part 57AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative symbol that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations below the left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passage gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big prize opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32 or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning or the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold memory, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be open based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the big winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) are set. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the big hit game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature 103SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the present embodiment, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", or "normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach". "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". Further, for a configuration similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same function, detailed description will be omitted by adding the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. It will be explained as a standard. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-19.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 103SG003, between a door opening position in which a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 103SG003 centering on the left side and a door closing position in which the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 103SG003 and the glass. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which a (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 103SG002R is a left game area 103SG002L by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 103SG002L, and in the right game area 103SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 103SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 103SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 103SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 103SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 103SG201.

Since the board case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 103SG003 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003. Further, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 103SG051. Further, the lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Although the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the board case 103SG201, a display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 103SG201. That is, the display monitor 103SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 103SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st hold storage number Device 103SG025A, 2nd hold display 103SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 103SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbol, normal figure hold display 103SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 103SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 103SG002R. A game information display unit 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 103SG133 that lights up when in a probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 103SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is out of alignment or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 103SG025A and the second hold indicator 103SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 103SG025A and second hold display 103SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end lights up, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In the unit 103SG, the light is turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when one first special figure hold memory exists and two second special figure hold memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 103SG025A is lit and the second hold is held. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 103SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 103SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment includes the first movable body 103SG321 and the second movable body 103SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 103SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321 and the second movable body 103SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. The origin detection sensor 103SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 103SG332.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 103SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern on the main board 11 side. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment is the super reach fluctuation pattern, super reach α and super reach β. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-11, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table and the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-7 (A) and 8-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1292 are assigned to "big hits" and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the multiplying factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different (for example, setting). If the value is 1, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is set to be constant (for example, 5 times). May be good.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is determined regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, paying attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is set to 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical value range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-8 (A) and 8-8 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 8-9. In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, there may be a case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B even when the variable special chart is the second special chart and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined). Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect, and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. ~ 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of the judgment values of MR3 from 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), and the range is 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 340 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and the range is 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 21 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 160 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 120 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 290 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and up to 101 to 350 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the set value, and the set values are lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the superreach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are that the type of jackpot is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of jackpot is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for small hit determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997 regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 431 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 411 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and the range is 391 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and the range is 371 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 351 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4, the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for low-base medium total hold storage number 2 to 4), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 481 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 401 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8, the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach. The α-outlier variation pattern (PA2-2) is assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and the range is 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

In this way, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common decision rate regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered because the variable display is not executed.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values as the deviation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α outlier and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of super reach β are between each set value. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. It may be present, or only the determination ratio of any of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of order, the super reach α The determination rate of only one of the deviation pattern determination rate and the super reach β deviation variation pattern may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value is illustrated. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. That is, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or the specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The non-reach non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter fluctuation time than the non-reach non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize to be stored, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C), the variation is made by using the deviation pattern determination table that differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in each of the deviation pattern determination tables of the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the super reach deviation does not matter which of the numerical values 1 to 6 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of random numbers assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern out of the super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is out of super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed according to the fluctuation pattern of.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the variation pattern is determined at a different ratio for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, there is an example in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display unit 103SG029A, a second display unit 103SG029B, a third display unit 103SG029C, and a fourth display unit 103SG029D. The first display unit 103SG029A to the fifth display unit 103SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the shape of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 103SG029A to the fifth display unit 103SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 at the time of the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the display monitor 103SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low accuracy low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 balls in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Of the base L. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by controlling the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". If it is "5", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in red, and if the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can identify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (103SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 103SGsa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (103SGsa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. Is determined (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set to proceed to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010), and when the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa008; N), 103SGSa010 is not executed and 103SGSa010 is set. move on.

In 103SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the release sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch 103SG051 ON and the game machine frame 103SG003 open (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is (103SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (103SGsa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 103SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (103SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (103SGsa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, every time the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, the set value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. The command is output to the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in the set value confirmation process (103SGsa013c), the CPU 103 displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, the display of the set value on the display monitor 103SG029 may be terminated based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off.

When the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N) in 103SGSa011, the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the process of 103SGSa013a-103SGSa013c.

In 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (103SGSa009) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time ( 103SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (103SGsa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 103SGsa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGsa013d; N), the RAM clear process (103SGsa013e) Proceed to 103SGsa014 without executing.

In the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the set value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). .. That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017-103SGSa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address in which the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except the dress.

In 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (103SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

Further, in 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and the lock switch 103SG051 is ON, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (103SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processing of 103SGSa009-103SGSa016 is executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGsa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGsa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (103SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (103SGsa026; N), the processes of 103SGsa025 and 103SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (103SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 103SG029. Ends blinking (103SGsa027) and proceeds to 103SGsa028.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, an example is exemplified in which all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (103SGSa029) and allow interrupts (103SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (103SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution wait timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (103SGSa034; N), the processes of 103SGsa033 and 103SGsa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (103SGSa034; Y), a set value error error occurs. The first display unit 103SG029A, the second display unit 103SG029B, the third display unit 103SG029C, and the fourth display unit 103SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 103SG029, are used as notifications (error notifications) of the occurrence of the above or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change. "E." is displayed in each of the above (103SGSa035).

Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGsa036), and plays a game via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 103SGsa032-103SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), and the display monitor 103SG029 , The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-13, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 103SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (103SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not after determining that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or clearing the setting value changing flag in 103SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 103SGSa014 (103SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

8-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 103SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), the start is started. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the command buffer received at the time of winning (not shown), one buffer number It shifts upward by the minute (103SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 103SG, when the received variable display result specification command is the second variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, an even number of three symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) that are aligned with the symbols. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the 4th variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) in which 3 symbols are aligned with "7" is used as the stop symbol. decide. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probabilistic big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334" or "778", which is the same chance as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 to determine whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Variable display)
As the effect during the variable display, the effect suggests the advantageous state suggestion result that suggests that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the setting suggestion result that suggests the setting value that the CPU 103 performs in the set value change process. It is a production (predetermined production) that can be any of the above. In the feature unit 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach notice (notice effect) suggesting that the variable display mode may become a reach and become a big hit as an effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result. is there. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the set values 1 to 6 the set value is. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display in-process effect in which the effect result can be both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result, that is, both a reach notice and a setting suggestion can be executed. When it is possible, the reach notice in which the effect result is the advantageous state suggestion result can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 8-16, the variable display effect has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9, and the effect control CPU 120 is a variable display effect. When the execution is decided, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the variable display effect, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used. It is decided by lottery whether to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 8-18 (A) to 8-18 (C), the effect during variable display starts at the timing when a predetermined period elapses after the variable display of the symbol is started (the timing before the variable display mode reaches reach). Then, a plurality of (for example, eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger rides fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area. By fading out to the right side of the display area, the variable display effect ends. Further, an image Z2 showing that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped while the plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side may be displayed, and a set value is set depending on the number of the dropped paragliders. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body is destroyed and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies are destroyed and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and fall.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-18 (B) and 8-19 (A), in the patterns PT-1 to PT-8, the timing at which the paraglider is destroyed is the same, and each pattern PT-1 to PT-1 to 1 to 8 is destroyed. The number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 is destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number may be used). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like the pattern PT-8, but the mode in which the paragliders are destroyed is the pattern PT-. It is different from 8. Specifically, seven paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining one is destroyed at the second timing after the first timing when the other seven are destroyed. ..

Which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the effect period of such a variable display effect, that is, the reach notice or the effect result in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result is the setting suggestion result. Regardless of which of the setting suggestions, the effect of the common mode (for example, the effect of the aspect in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area). Is executed, and a non-common mode of effect (for example, a number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is an image display device) that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result. It is composed of a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of 5) is executed.

In the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as the effect during the variable display, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but the decorative symbols are displayed in a smaller size than usual. Small symbols may be variably displayed at predetermined locations. Further, during the execution period of the variable display effect, another notice effect or the like different from the variable display effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-16, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. Regarding the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are defined as a specific pattern (specific mode) corresponding to the setting suggestion suggesting which of the 6 to 6 is set and the number of paragliders destroyed is eight. It is said to be a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to the reach notice that suggests the possibility of reaching. That is, the effect during variable display has the same effect mode in the common effect period, but the suggestion target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode (the number of paragliders destroyed) in the non-common effect period, and 1 to 7 paragliders. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest that the set values may be odd (for example, 1, 3, 5), and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 have even set values. (For example, 2, 4, 6), the pattern PT-5 suggests that the set value may be equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5), and the pattern PT-5. 6 suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6). ..

The patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is regarded as the first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with a low expectation that it is, and for patterns PT-5 to PT-6, the set value is any of 5 and 6. In some cases, it is determined at a high rate, so that it is a second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high), second specific mode} with a high degree of expectation that the set values are 5 and 6.

In the feature unit 103SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high. However, the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high. Then, the setting values 1 and 2 may be set to a low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 may be set to an intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 may be set to a high setting to set the execution ratio of the effect pattern.

On the other hand, the pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and the pattern PT-9 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding the pattern PT-8, the variable display mode of the symbol is determined at a high rate when it becomes the normal reach, so that the expectation of becoming the super reach is low. The first special pattern {reach notice (low), the first Regarding the pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach, which is highly expected to become super reach, is determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the symbol becomes super reach. Notice (high), second special aspect}.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests that the jackpot game state is controlled, and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-) that suggests the setting. It is possible to execute a variable display effect based on any one of a plurality of types of effect modes including 1 to PT-7), and a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (predetermined effect of a special mode). When any of the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of a specific aspect) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, the reach notice can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 are determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is out of alignment than when it is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 becomes a super reach, that is, the jackpot expectation is a pattern. While the pattern is lower than PT-9, the pattern PT-9 is determined because the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is out of order. , Super reach, that is, a pattern with a higher expectation of jackpot than pattern PT-8.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the variable display effect, a mode suggesting the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set depending on the number of paragliders destroyed has been illustrated, but the present invention illustrates this. It is not limited, and the appearance of a predetermined number (for example, 8) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders may suggest a big hit or a high setting. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and which setting value is set, the effect mode can be changed in various ways, for example, the number of characters appearing, the type of character appearing, and the like. It may be something that can suggest a big hit or a set value.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the number corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or emitting a game effect lamp 9 or the like when falling, it may be possible to notify that the pattern has a high expectation of a big hit or a high setting.

As shown in FIG. 8-15, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result specification command for specifying the variable display result (off, non-probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area.

Then, the random numbers for determining the reach notice type are extracted, and the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 8-17 (A) is used to determine whether or not the reach notice is executed in the variable display effect. A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach notice in the case of (103SGS292).

In the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 8-17 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 20 is assigned to the pattern PT-8. A number of determination values are assigned, and 60 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-9. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than super reach.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. There is. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than normal reach.

When the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to the patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, it is easier to win the pattern PT-8 at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than the normal reach fluctuation pattern, and when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, Pattern PT-9 is easier to win at a higher rate than in cases other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, when an effect based on pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach variation pattern than a super reach variation pattern, and when an effect based on pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than a normal reach variation pattern. It is likely to be a reach variation pattern. In other words, pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is considered as a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that it will be, it is considered to be a reach notice (high) pattern with a high expectation of big hits.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of performing a lottery on whether or not the reach notice is executed and the type of the 103SGS292. (103SGS293). When it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in preference to the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). Proceed to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in 103SGS292 that the pattern PT-9 has not been won, that is, if the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 is won, the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low). } Is won, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out, and the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (103SGS295). Next, the random numbers for determining the setting suggestion type are extracted, and the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the set value specified in 103SGS295 is used to determine whether or not the setting suggestion is executed in the variable display effect. A lottery is performed to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 8-17 (B), when the set value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1. Judgment values are assigned, pattern PT-2 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-3 is assigned 25 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 judgment values, and patterns. Four judgment values are assigned to PT-5, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 25 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 1 judgment value, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 4 judgment values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 20 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 5 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 judgment values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 25 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 judgment values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 10 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 25 judgment values. Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number 1 or 3, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. When the set value is 2 or 4, it is easy to win, and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are easily won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and the set value is 5. Is easier to win the pattern PT-5 at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, the pattern PT-6 is won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's easier to do. Further, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, it is confirmed that the set value is 6 when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if an effect based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider is destroyed. If the effect based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with 5 or more bodies is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is any of 5 and 6. That is, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are considered to be setting suggestions (low) that are unlikely to be set high (set value 5 or 6), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are set to high (set value 5 or 6). It is said that the setting suggestion (high) is likely to be 6).

In the first embodiment, the reach advance notice type determination random number and the setting suggestion type determination random number are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of judgment values of each determination random number is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number and the like should be appropriately determined. Just do it. Further, each determination random number counter for generating each of these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in the random number update process.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 performed a lottery for the presence / absence of execution of the setting suggestion and the type in 103SGS296, and as a result, any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was obtained. It is determined whether or not the player has won (103SGS297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been won, and if the non-execution of the reach notice is won in 103SGS293, the winning pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the setting is uniquely determined and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293, any one of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won. The execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the above is determined in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won. , 103SGS297 determines whether or not pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293 based on non-execution of setting suggestion or winning of any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. (103SGS300).

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has been won in 103SGS300, and if the non-execution of the setting suggestion is won in 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is executed. If any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won in 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 is Execution is determined in preference to the setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in the 103SGS300 that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has not been won, it is determined whether or not any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} has been won. If the determination (103SGS302) is made and any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, the execution of the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. Further, when none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, that is, when the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is in progress without deciding the execution of the effect. The production determination process ends.

In 103SGS304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. The variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that has been determined is set (103SGS305), and the variable display effect determination process ends.

Returning to FIG. 8-14, after the variable display effect determination process of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 in 103SGS278 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution decision flag is set, that is, the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277. It is determined whether or not the execution of the variable display effect of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined in the process.

If the variable display effect execution decision flag is set, the process proceeds to 103SGS279, and the period until the variable display effect start is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer (103SGS279), and the variable display effect execution is executed. Clear the decision flag (103SGS280) and proceed to 103SGS281. On the other hand, if the effect execution decision flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the variable display effect, in this feature unit 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is set as the start timing of the variable display effect, and the process table of the variable display effect executed from the start of the variable display effect. Since the variable display effect is started based on the above, an example is shown in which the period until the start timing of the variable display effect is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect (not shown) showing a precursor is performed before the timing at which the variable display effect is started, and the timing at which the precursor is started is the variable display effect. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the variable display effect is started may be set in the variable display effect start wait timer.

In the 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (103SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (103SGS284). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing (S172) during variable display (103SGS286).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the symbol based on the reach variation pattern, the predetermined variable display mode is determined after the variable display is started and before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. At the effect timing, either reach notice or setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect, and when deciding whether or not to execute the variable display effect, the effect result becomes the advantageous state suggestion result. It is possible to execute (the effect of the special aspect) with priority over the setting suggestion (the effect of the specific aspect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display of FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach notice is executed and the type lottery, and whether or not the setting suggestion is executed and the type lottery. Give priority to.

That is, in the reach notice lottery, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294). The notice (high) will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 60%. Even if the lottery for setting suggestion is executed in 103SGS296 based on the winning of the reach notice (low), the setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is executed in 103SGS297 (high). ) Is not won, 103SGS301 will decide to execute the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8, so the reach notice will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. Become.

Further, the reach notice includes a reach notice (low) and a reach notice (high) suggesting that the ratio of being controlled by a big hit is higher than the reach notice (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT. When both the reach notice (high) based on −9 and the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is set to pattern PT-. It is executed with priority over the setting suggestion based on any of 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion (high) based on the setting suggestion (high) in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the reach notice from being excessively prioritized and the execution of the setting suggestion to be restricted, so that the interest of the effect during the variable display is lowered.

Further, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) suggesting that the setting is more likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT. When both the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is used. The setting suggestion (high) based on is executed in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-8 is set. Based reach notice (low) can be executed in preference to setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being excessively prioritized and the execution of the reach notice being restricted, so that the interest of the effect during the variable display is lowered.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For details, the reach notice (high) is executed with priority over the setting suggestion (high), the setting suggestion (high) is executed with priority over the reach notice (low), and the reach notice (low) is set and suggested (low). Priority is given to execution over low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low)".

In the feature unit 103SG, the execution ratio of the reach notice may be set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the variable display effect is an effect executed during the variable display period of the symbol, and the reach notice suggests that the variable display result may be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least. It suggests which setting value is not changed during the business period. Further, it is not preferable for the amusement park that the setting suggestion frequently occurs and the player can easily guess which of the set values is. Therefore, when the effect during variable display is executed in the super reach fluctuation pattern and when the set value is set high, it is preferable for the player to suggest any of them, but the set value is suggested at another timing. On the other hand, since the jackpot suggestion can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the reach notice appears at a higher rate than the setting suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display effect is an effect that is executed only during the variable display period of the super reach variation pattern or the symbol based on the normal reach variation pattern, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the non-reach variation pattern, the variable display mode is reach. In this case, the player's expectation for the big hit is higher than in the case of not reaching. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, especially in the case of the jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot will decrease and the production will be inappropriate. By giving priority to the setting suggestion to be executed, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming inappropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, as a tendency of the effect during variable display, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, for example, it is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and is high. In some situations, such as when the setting is made, the execution ratio may be set so that the setting suggestion is executed in preference to the reach notice.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is executed prior to the lottery for the setting suggestion (priority). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution rate of the reach notice is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion, the lottery for the setting suggestion may be performed before the lottery for the reach notice. , The order is arbitrary. Further, if the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach notice is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, it is shown in FIGS. 8-17 (A) and 8-17 (B). It is not limited to what is described.

In the first embodiment, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a mode in which a setting suggestion suggesting a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and as a setting suggestion, it may be suggested whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has changed since the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started last time.

(First invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed, but for example, a notice effect that suggests that a jackpot state, which is an advantageous state, is obtained and the above-mentioned When either of the setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as the set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Therefore, there was a problem that the production became inappropriate. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect by any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means (for example, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the symbol (variable display mode). (Timing before reaching)), the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed in preference to the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used in FIG. 8- of the first embodiment). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach advance notice lottery, the execution of the reach advance notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in 103SGS294 with priority over the setting suggestion. Even if the lottery of the setting suggestion is executed in the part or 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 in 103SGS301 is not won. ) Is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. / The effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice (high)> the setting suggestion (high). > Reach notice (low)> Setting suggestion (low) A part that determines the execution of an effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio (see Fig. 8-20 of variant 1))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate.

Specifically, even when the variable display that makes the variable display result a big hit is executed, the setting suggestion that can be suggested at the timing other than the variable display is executed with priority over the reach notice. , It is not possible to raise the player's expectation for the big hit, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The special aspect is a first special aspect (for example, reach notice (low)) and a second special aspect (for example, reach notice) that suggests that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first special aspect. (High)), including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second special aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example). When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the reach advance notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the reach advance notice based on the pattern PT-9 in 103SGS294 ( High) execution is determined in preference to setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the 103SGS298. The part that prioritizes the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 over the reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The specific aspect is a first specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (high)) that suggests setting of a setting value having a higher advantage than the first specific aspect. )) Including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example). When any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT in the 103SGS298. The part that determines the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the reach notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 is set to the 103SGS301. The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
An operation promotion notification means capable of executing an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to execute an operation (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation validity period of the push button 31B. The feasible part.) And
An operation detecting means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific operation (for example, an operation for operating the push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the operation promotion notification by the operation prompting means is executed. When,
With
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific operation by the motion detecting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 presses the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific operation to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not the operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can perform the effect of changing to image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it). Modification example)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a player who knows a specific motion can execute a predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The predetermined effect is a common effect period (for example, a reach notice or a setting suggestion) in which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect or the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. Regardless of the presence or absence, the effect of the mode in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area is executed) and the predetermined aspect of the special aspect. A non-common production period (for example, whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion) that can specify whether the production or the predetermined production of the specific mode can be specified, that is, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the production pattern Is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward from the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIG. 8-18).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by having a common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation as to which of the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, both a reach notice and a setting suggestion can be executed). Occasionally, a specific image suggesting both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, an image in which a paraglider in which a character appears moves while displaying an image Z1 of a paraglider) is displayed. Part etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed is, for example, a suggestion about the display result of one variable display. As long as it is possible to suggest a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, various timings may be used. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory can be executed. If it is suggested about the display result of, the reach notice can be executed at any timing in the period over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the hold storage is executed and the execution period of the variable display. .. Further, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

Further, when both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed, the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion. Priority is given to the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed before the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Includes determining, and performing reach notices based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Note that executing the reach notice at a higher rate than the setting suggestion includes a case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the possibility of a big hit or a set value is suggested by the number of destroyed paragliders, that is, the variable display in-process effect executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed. As an example, a form in which the effect result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are feasible. As the effect during variable display, both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result may be included as the effect result.

That is, in the first embodiment, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode is different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (in the common effect period). It may be a separate production (which does not have a corresponding period) (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification example 1)
Next, the modification 1 in the first embodiment of the feature unit 103SG will be described with reference to FIG. 8-20. 8-20 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process during variable display as the first modification, and FIG. 8-20 is a diagram showing the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion by prioritizing the execution of the reach notice and the lottery of the type over the lottery of the execution of the setting suggestion and the type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for reach notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-20 (A), in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, the random numbers for determining the effect type are extracted, and the effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) is used to determine whether or not the variable display effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) is executed. A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach notice or setting suggestion when the execution is performed (103SGS312).

The effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) is not shown in particular, but the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is set according to the type of the variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, although the determination ratios of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 differ depending on the type of the fluctuation pattern and the set values 1 to 6, the execution ratios of the reach notice and the setting suggestion shown in FIG. 8-20 (B) are different. As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (priority) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, that is, the decision rate is set to be higher in the order of reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. (For example, reach notice is determined by 50%, setting suggestion is determined by 40%, and non-execution is determined by 10%).

Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the reach notice (high) is higher than the reach notice (low) (for example, the reach notice (high) is 40% and the reach notice (low) is 10%). It is preferable to determine with. When the set values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) is higher than that of setting suggestion (low) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35% and setting suggestion (low) is 5). %) Is preferable. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has an effect based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). You just have to decide what to do.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, the embodiment in which the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern, the set value, and the variable display result. Specifically, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach fluctuation pattern, when a big hit occurs, the reach notice should be executed at a higher rate than when it is missed, prioritizing the setting suggestion. Is preferable.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect. Although the possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result are feasible as the effect result, the effect result of the variable display effect is displayed. It may be possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As a specific effect, for example, when a specific image suggesting both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, a paraglider image Z1 is displayed, a character is displayed. Display an image in which the paraglider in which appears is moving, etc.), or display an image in which the display mode of the paraglider (for example, color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode. It may be displayed, the background color may be different, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special effect sound may be output according to the image display of the paraglider, or the illuminant may be made to emit light in a special light emitting mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result is obtained as the effect result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display effect, while the reach notice and the setting suggestion are variable. It may be possible to execute each independently at an effect timing different from the effect being displayed.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice (for example, a character notice in which a character appears) in a mode different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. 8-18 at a different production timing from the variable display effect. On the other hand, the setting suggestion in a mode different from the setting suggestion shown in FIGS. 8-18 (for example, the ending image of the big hit) is given at a timing different from the effect during variable display (for example, after the end of the big hit). It may be feasible.

In Example 1 of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the effect during variable display can be executed only once during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect during variable display may be executed a plurality of times during the variable display of.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A) as the second embodiment, the first period from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. And in the second period after the first period, the variable display effect can be executed.

Since the variable display time is short to execute the variable display effect twice or more for the non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns, in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. However, it is also possible to include a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern as an execution target of the effect during variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, the presence or absence of the variable display effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 8-21 (B) is used according to the variation pattern. Determined at different rates. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 40 out of 100 random numbers for determining the effect during variable display are displayed in the variable display effect execution decision table. Is assigned to the execution of the variable display effect, and 60 are assigned to the non-execution of the variable display effect. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 60 out of 100 random numbers for determining the execution of the variable display effect are assigned to the execution of the variable display effect in the variable display effect execution decision table. Individuals are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display.

When the execution of the variable display effect is determined in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 8-21 (A).

When the variable display is determined to be executed during the variable display when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, it is executed in the first period as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (A) and 8-22 (B). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice at different ratios between the variable display effect to be performed and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. In the same period, the execution ratios of the setting suggestion and the reach notice are set to be the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the effect type (effect) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period. The pattern) is determined to be either pattern PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , 40% to determine pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expected (low) or expected (high)). Further, as shown in FIG. 8-24, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is patterned at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Determined to be either PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)), and at a rate of 60%, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation). (High)) is decided.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT- at a rate of 1%. Any of 5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. At a rate of 2.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, it was decided as pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Any one of {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 55%, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. Any one of {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided at a rate of 5% {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 was decided at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 is decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 15%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice is decided at a rate of 25%. (High)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 15% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, it was decided on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, it was decided as a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 56.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the execution of the variable display effect is decided, the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach is used as the effect type of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. The rate (60%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach as the effect type of the variable display during the first period. It is set higher than the rate (40%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is decided.

Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice that becomes the advantageous state suggestion result becomes easier to be executed, so that one game result, that is, a timing close to the timing at which the variable display result of the variable display is derived. Expectations for big hits can be increased.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, regarding the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period, any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low)). Or, while the rate at which the setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set higher than the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined. As for the effect type of the variable display effect that is executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern. Any of PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the determined ratio.

That is, the patterns PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 corresponding to the reach notice are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are the second. By determining the period at a lower rate than the first period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the second period. ..

Therefore, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as the variable display effect in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as the variable display effect in the second period, that is, the variable display is in progress. The variable display is caused by the fact that the reach notice is executed so that the expectation of the reach notice decreases as the effect is repeatedly executed (so-called downfall), or the reach notice (high) is executed in the first time. By allowing the player to predict that is likely to be super reach before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectation that the variable display is super reach is reduced. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect performed in the second period is more effective than the variable display effect executed in the first period. However, the rate at which any of patterns PT-5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is executed, the variable display effect becomes easier to be executed in the pattern PT-9, so that the game against the variable display effect being executed in the patterns PT-5 to PT-8. The expectation of the person can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect is executed twice in the first period and the second period, but the present invention illustrates this. When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect may be executed three or more times. When the variable display effect is executed three or more times in this way, the effect type determination ratio is set so that the pattern PT-9 can be easily determined each time the variable display effect is executed. It may be possible to maintain the expectation of the engineer for a longer period of time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have the pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratio of 1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is different, it is executed in the variable display in-stage effect executed in the first period and in the second period. It is difficult to continuously execute the setting suggestion with the effect during variable display. That is, it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from being lowered due to the variable display being effect becoming monotonous due to the setting suggestion being executed in both of these two variable display during effects.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have the pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratio of 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is different, it is executed in the variable display during the first period and in the second period. It is difficult for the reach notice to be executed continuously with the effect during variable display. That is, in both of these two variable display productions, it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from being lowered due to the variable display production becoming monotonous due to the execution of the reach notice.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is used in the first period, although the mode in which the reach notice is executed is different from the case of executing the variable display. The rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect may be the same between the case where the variable display effect is executed and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. By doing so, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the second period, the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect, and the first period and the second period are used. You can expect the player in the same way.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display advance notice effect executed in the same period is irrespective of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined is the same as the variable display notice effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display notice effect executed in the same period is not limited to this. , The rate at which the execution of the reach notice is determined as the effect during variable display may differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing so, the rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect in the first period or the second period changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-26, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the first period, the ratio (pattern PT-1 to 1) that determines the execution of the setting suggestion. The ratio for determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (pattern). The rate of determining the execution of PT-8 or the pattern PT9) is set to 40%, which is the same rate regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine. Similarly, focusing on the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the ratio for determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio for determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) is the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regardless of the set value, it is set to 40%, which is the same ratio, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (the ratio for determining the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set for the pachinko gaming machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Therefore, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed in the first period is always performed. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display during the second period (the second variable display during the effect) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the reach notice is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be expected to execute the setting suggestion in the same way.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, the chances of providing reach notice and setting suggestion in one variable display increase, so that the interest is improved. ..

More specifically, when only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than the variable display (for example, the ending or variable display of the jackpot game state). It is possible to execute it independently (when not executing), but when the player is playing a game, the most noticeable thing is during the execution period of the variable display. Therefore, in the variable display in-process effect in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, not only the setting suggestion can be executed during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays most attention to, but also the setting suggestion can be executed in the second embodiment. As described above, by making it possible to execute the variable display effect multiple times in one variable display, not only can the chance of executing the setting suggestion be increased, but also the second period in the first period as described above. If it is executed at a higher rate, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the reach notice even in the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot.

Further, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during the variable display, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and in at least one of the first period and the second period, it may be decided not to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion.

When it is possible to determine non-execution in this way, even if the execution rate of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, if the execution rate of the reach notice is different between the first period and the second period. Can be made. Further, even if the execution rate of the reach notice is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Second invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed, but for example, a notice effect that suggests that a jackpot state, which is an advantageous state, is obtained and the above-mentioned When either of the setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as the set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Therefore, there was a problem that the production became inappropriate. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display) capable of executing the predetermined effect by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes. The part that can execute the setting suggestion based on, or the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9)
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect when the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, FIG. 8-21 as Example 2). As shown, during the variable display of normal reach and super reach), in the second number of times after the first number of times, than when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. Reach based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 when the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period than when the variable display effect is executed. The part that executes the notice at a high rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect is easily executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the variable display effect executed in the second period is easier to execute the reach notice than the variable display effect executed in the first period. It is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled during the second period, which is closer to the timing when the variable display ends than the first period.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the specific aspect at a rate lower than the ratio of executing the predetermined effect of the specific aspect in the first number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display during the effect in the first period in the second period after the first period. The part that executes the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which is a specific pattern, at a lower rate when the effect during variable display is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation for an advantageous state because a predetermined effect of a specific mode is easily executed at a timing close to one game result.

Specifically, even if it is not possible to determine non-execution as a variable display effect, it is possible to determine the reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The predetermined effect executing means is
When the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2). In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is a special pattern pattern PT-. 8 or the part to be executed at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2). In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is given as the specific pattern pattern PT-1 to 1. The part to be executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion based on any of PT-7)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect, but it becomes difficult to execute the predetermined effect of the specific aspect. Therefore, the advantageous state is obtained at a timing close to one game result. Expectations can be raised suitably.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is more than the start of the normal reach effect. The part where the effect can be executed during variable display in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, so that the interest is improved.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect may be executed even during the reach effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display (target variation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice. The part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until the start)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed even before the variable display that is the result of one game is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special mode which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are feasible, the paraglider in which the character appears moves when displaying a specific image (for example, paraglider image Z1) that suggests both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6). The part that displays images, etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

(Third invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect during variable display) capable of executing a predetermined effect by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes is provided.
The production mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode (for example, a setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4) that suggests a setting, and a setting and a type suggested in the first suggestion mode. Includes a second suggestion embodiment (eg, setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-7) that makes suggestions for different settings.
When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode when the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, FIG. 2 as a second embodiment). As shown in 8-21, during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach), the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times, and after the first number of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26 and 8 to 28 to 8). As shown in −31, when the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display effect in the first period and the second period during the variable display of the normal reach or the super reach as the second or third embodiment, The part where the setting suggestion (strong) is executed at a higher rate when the variable display effect is executed in the second period than when the variable display effect is executed in the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is easily executed, so that the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is executed is maintained. Can be done.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect executed during the second period suggests a setting (stronger) than the variable display effect executed during the first period. Is easy to execute, so that the player's expectation that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a high set value such as 4 to 6 can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting the setting, suggests an odd number setting or an even number setting, and the first suggestion. The setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is the second suggestion mode in which the setting suggested in the mode and the setting of a different type are suggested, is a form suggesting an intermediate setting or higher or the highest setting. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second suggestion mode may be any one as long as it suggests a setting different from the setting suggested in the first suggestion mode, for example, the first suggestion. The set value suggested in the embodiment and the set value suggested in the second suggested embodiment may all be different set values (for example, the first suggested embodiment suggests the set value 1 and the second suggested embodiment is set). When the value 6 is suggested, or when the first suggestion mode suggests odd setting values 1, 3, 5 and the second suggestion mode suggests even setting 2, 4, 6), the first suggestion mode suggests. A common setting value may be included in both the setting value to be set and the setting value suggested in the second suggestion mode (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests the setting values 1 to 4 and the second suggestion mode is Even if one of the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode is a suggestion about a setting change and the other is a suggestion about a set value that is set. Good. That is, not only the setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also the setting to be suggested when there are a plurality of setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode. Includes those with different numbers and ranges of values, or those with different suggestions.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is specified including the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. The predetermined effect of the aspect can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the case where the effect is executed. The part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is executed at the same ratio in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed at the first time or the second time, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

Specifically, after setting the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion to be the same (or a lower rate in the second period than in the first period) in the first period and the second period, the effect during variable display in the first period By executing the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing, it is possible to avoid excessive execution of the setting suggestion. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the high set value.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The predetermined effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the ratio of executing the predetermined effect of the special aspect in the first number of times (for example, Example 2). As shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period, as compared with the case where the variable display effect is executed in the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is executed at a higher rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the ratio of the predetermined effect of the special mode being executed increases, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.

In Example 2, if the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period, the setting suggestion (strong) can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period. However, the reach notice can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is more than the start of the normal reach effect. The part where the effect can be executed during variable display in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, so that the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display (target variation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice. The part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until the start)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed even before the variable display that is the result of one game is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special mode which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are feasible, the paraglider in which the character appears moves when displaying a specific image (for example, paraglider image Z1) that suggests both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6). The part that displays images, etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

(Fourth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect by any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. part),
The predetermined effect of the specific aspect is performed when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the effect in the first period and after the first period. The part where the ratio of executing the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is different from the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period of
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the easiness of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode differs between the first and second times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion as the variable display effect at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, while the second period. By determining the execution of the setting suggestion as the variable display effect at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion in the second period, which is a timing close to the variable display result. Since the reach notice is easily executed, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased. In the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, while in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice. ..

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period, the pattern PT-8 Or the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

In Example 2, if the non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the reach notice can be made the same while the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). As shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is performing the variable display during the first period and during the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio in the case of executing the production)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, while in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice. In the second period, which is close to the variable display result, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion, but also the reach notice is easily executed, so that the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value among the plurality of set values is set and the first set value is different from the first set value. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio as when the two set values are set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first. When executing the effect during variable display during the period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 When executing the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). Set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios depending on the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Fifth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect by any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. part),
A plurality of times when the first set value is set among the plurality of set values and when the second set value different from the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. Of these, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed at the same ratio in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the pachinko game is performed for the variable display effect to be executed in the first period. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the machine 1, and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part where the suggestion is executed at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of which of the first set value and the second set value is set, the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode does not change at the predetermined number of times, so that the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed. On the other hand, we can expect the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-26, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed in the first period regardless of which of the values 1 to 6 is set as the set value. The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect (appearance status) and the rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect during the second period (appearance status) are the same, that is, the set value is Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion is the same regardless of whether the low setting value or the high setting value is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the setting value depending on the appearance status of the setting suggestion.

In the second embodiment, even if any of 1 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period. Although the mode in which the ratio (appearance status) is not different from the ratio (appearance status) in which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the second period is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. Rather, the ratio (appearance status) of setting suggestion as a variable display effect executed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2) out of a plurality of setting values 1 to 6. If the ratio (appearance status) of the setting suggestion being executed as the variable display effect executed in the second period is the same, the setting values (for example, 3 to 6) other than the above two setting values are the second. The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed (appearance status) may not be the same in the first period and the second period.

Furthermore, only in the variable display effect of either the variable display effect executed in the first period or the variable display effect executed in the second period, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has 1 to 6 set values. Regardless of which value is set, the rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period (appearance status) and the variable display effect executed in the second period The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed (appearance status) may not be different.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the embodiment at the same ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period). Then, the part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the first. The part where the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed at different ratios depending on the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value among the plurality of set values is set and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the variable execution is performed in the first period. For the display effect, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set for the pachinko game machine 1, and the variable display effect to be executed during the second period is set for the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes reach notice at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

More specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period, it is set. It is set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach, but the present invention is limited thereto. It is possible to set a period other than the above as long as it is a period from the start to the end of the variable display until the variable display result is displayed. For example, the first period is from the start to the end of normal reach, the second period is from the start to the end of super reach, the first period is from the start of normal reach or super reach, and the second period is normal reach. Or until the end of Super Reach, or by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be simulated multiple times. In the case of a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect that looks like the variable display of, the first period is set as the start timing of the first re-variable display, the second period is set as the start timing of the second re-variable display, and the like. , May correspond to the revariable display period.

In the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and the same number of variable display effects can be reached regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. An example is shown in which the execution of the notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at the same ratio. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) and 8-27 (B) as Example 3, the effect during variable display is 2 during one variable display. When it is possible to execute the pachinko machine 1 times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, even if the same number of variable display effects are performed. You may.

When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect and the second period are executed in the first period as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) and 8-27 (B). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice at the same ratio for each of the variable display during production executed in.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. Determined to be -8 {setting suggestion (high)}, determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and to pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and a rate of 2%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 30%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 35%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 40%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 40%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 45%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a ratio of 47%, and a ratio of 3%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 45%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 50%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 41.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 50%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 55%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 55%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 and 8-31, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 17.5%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 17.5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and 2 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 30% The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and determined at a rate of 20%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 20%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. 2. Determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, and determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, 22.5% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided by the ratio, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at the ratio of 22.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 40 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to one of pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 25%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and 3 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 45%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, 27.5% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided by the ratio, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at the ratio of 27.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , 4.5% of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 50 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 at a rate of 5%, determined to be one of pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 30%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 30%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55% The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the first period is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being any of 1 to 6. Patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the production type of the effect during variable display, and the variable display is executed in the second period. The ratio at which the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the medium effect. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, the rate at which pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined as the effect type of the variable display effect executed in the first period and in the second period The rate at which the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the effect during variable display to be executed. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach notice is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same way.

On the other hand, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type differs between the set value (for example, set value 6). , Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period, a pattern is set as an effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. The rate at which PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined decreases, and pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice ( High)} is determined more often. Therefore, when a high setting value (for example, 5, 6) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting is suggested as compared with a case where a low setting value (for example, 1 to 4) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is difficult to execute, so that it is difficult for the player who recognizes the effect during variable display to specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment, the variable display effect executed in the second period is the pattern PT-9 as the effect type than the variable display effect executed in the first period. The rate at which {setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 becomes easier to be executed, so that the player's expectation that the variable display effect is executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. Can be made to.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, regardless of whether the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display executed in the first period is in progress. The ratio of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is the same between the effect and the variable display effect executed in the second period. Although the embodiment in which the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined at the same rate is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. , Even if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is obtained between the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. ~ PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} may be determined at different rates, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice The rate at which (high)} is determined may be different.

In the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period, which are the same as the variable display effect. Although the mode of executing the setting suggestion by the ratio is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the first period and the second period. The setting suggestion may be executed at different ratios as these variable display effects depending on the case of executing the variable display effect. By doing so, the rate (appearance rate) at which the setting suggestion is executed changes depending on whether the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the first period and the variable display executed in the second period. When executing the reach notice as the middle effect (the second variable display during the effect), an example of a form in which the reach notice is executed at a different ratio according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display during effect (first variable display during effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 during the first period and the variable display during effect executed during the second period. When executing the reach notice as (the second variable display effect), if the number of variable display effects is the same, the reach notice is given at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may do it. By doing so, if the effect is during variable display the same number of times, the rate at which the reach notice is executed (appearance status) does not change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , The player can still expect that the reach notice is executed by the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period.

(Sixth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect by any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect).
The predetermined effect of the specific aspect is performed when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as Example 3, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the effect in the first period, and more than in the first period. The part where the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio as when the variable display effect is executed in the second period later)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed at the first time or the second time, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, there are cases where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and a case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio (65% in the example shown in FIG. 8-27) as the middle effect, it is set between the variable display effect to be executed in the first period and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. The player can be expected to do the same for the suggestion to be executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio as in the case of executing the middle effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). , The pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period is a special pattern than the variable display effect in the first period. The part that executes reach notice based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a high rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In Example 3, if the non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the reach notice can be made different while the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value among the plurality of set values is set and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). When the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value and the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. In addition, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

More specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value when the variable display effect is executed in
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(7th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect by any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started).
A plurality of times when the first set value is set among the plurality of set values and when the second set value different from the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. Among them, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at different ratios at a predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect during variable display in the first period. When executing, the part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed at different ratios according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-31, the effect control CPU 120 is variably displayed in the first period depending on which of 1 to 6 the value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is. Since the execution rate (appearance status) of the setting suggestion changes depending on whether the medium effect is executed or the variable display medium effect is executed in the second period, the player can perform not only the result of the setting suggestion but also the predetermined number of times. It is possible to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the setting suggestion in.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the second. The part where the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed at the same ratio as when the effect during variable display is executed during the period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at different ratios (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and when the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value among the plurality of set values is set and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). When the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value and the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. In addition, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

More specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value when the variable display effect is executed in
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the second and third embodiments of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and when the execution of the variable display effect is determined, the first period Although, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is described. Determines whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion based on the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, while for the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value. It may be decided which to be executed, that is, whether to execute the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period according to different judgment criteria.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as Example 4, the first period and the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach are targeted for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. It is possible to execute the variable display effect in the second period after the first period. Since the variable display time is short to execute the variable display effect twice or more for the non-reach and small hit variation patterns, in the fourth embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. Limited to.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the variable display effect determination process described above, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of the variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period. In the second period, a process of determining the type of effect during variable display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern. In the following, the variable display effect determination process in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-33.

As shown in FIGS. 8-33, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variation pattern (103SGS311). As described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. Then, it is determined whether the specified fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach (103SGS312), and if it is normal reach or super reach, the process proceeds to 103SG313, and if it is other than normal reach or super reach, that is, a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern. In this case, since it is not subject to the variable display effect, the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach in 103SGS312, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out to specify the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGS313). Next, based on the set value specified by 103SGS313, whether or not the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the variable display effect is executed are determined by a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown). It is determined using (common to normal reach and super reach) (103SGS314).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), in 103SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 uses a variable display effect execution determination table whose fluctuation pattern is common to normal reach or super reach, and reaches notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Decide on one of. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and the non-execution at a rate of 10%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice is determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set. It is set so that the larger the value is, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion and the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-35, paying attention to the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the first period, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 20%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 39%. Then, the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 18%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 15%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined not to be executed at a rate of 12.5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 45.5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 10%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 3.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a ratio of 5%, and a ratio of 40%. Determine the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, it is determined in 103SGS314 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined (103SGS315), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (patterns PT-1 to PT). -9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and a variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined is set (103SGS317). Proceed to 103SGS318. If the execution is not decided in the 103SGS315, that is, if the non-execution is decided, the process proceeds to the 103SGS318.

Next, in 103SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (103SGS318), and if it is determined to be normal reach, the second is based on the specified fluctuation pattern and set value. Whether or not the variable display effect is executed during the period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the effect is executed are determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for normal reach) (not shown) (103SGS319).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (B), in 103SGS319, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution by using the variable display during effect execution determination table for normal reach. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution at a rate of 5%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-36, paying attention to the case of normal reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the case where the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. Determines the non-execution of the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period at a rate of 5%, and patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (setting suggestion) at a rate of 33%. Low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3% In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a ratio of 6%, and a ratio of 55%. In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

Further, when it is determined in 103SGS318 that the fluctuation pattern is not the normal reach, that is, it is the super reach, whether or not the variable display during the second period is executed and the execution are performed based on the specified fluctuation pattern and the set value. The effect type (effect pattern) in the case of performing is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (not shown) (103SGS320).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (C), in the 103SGS320, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution by using the effect execution determination table during variable display for super reach. .. Specifically, in the case of the setting value 1 and the setting value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and does not execute. Do not decide. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-36, paying attention to the case of super reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In this case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 36%, and 4%. The ratio was determined to be pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55% to determine pattern PT-9 { Reach notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.8%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 33.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 6.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, it is determined in 103SGS319 or 103SGS320 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined (103SGS321), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1). (Any of PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and a variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined is set (103SGS323). ), Ends the effect during variable display. If the execution is not decided in 103SGS321, that is, if the non-execution is decided, the variable display during effect ends.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period of the plurality of times, the installation value is 1 to 1 regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. When deciding whether or not to execute the setting suggestion based on which of 6 is used and executing the variable display effect in the second period, it depends on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Reach notice or setting suggestion is determined based on a separate judgment table. That is, since the criteria for determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Further, since the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion is easily executed in the first period, whereas the reach notice is given in the second period. Is easier to execute, so even though it becomes normal reach or super reach in the second period, the setting suggestion does not become easier to execute in both the first period and the second period, and , Since the reach notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is not easily executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

Further, since the execution rate of the reach notice in the second period is higher than the execution rate of the reach notice in the first period, it is variablely displayed by executing the reach notice in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 to 8-37, paying attention to each set value, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not included. When the execution of the reach notice is decided at the same ratio (40%) and the variable display effect is executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is decided at the same ratio (60%). Therefore, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display in effect executed in the second period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the reach notice is executed. The player can be noticed in the same way.

In addition, even if the set value is set high (for example, set values 5 and 6), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only is the reach notice easier to execute than the setting suggestion in the second period, but also the super reach In this case, the reach notice (high) is likely to be executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation for a big hit.

Furthermore, even if the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed than in the case where the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the first period. Even when is executed, the player's expectation for the high setting can be increased.

Further, in the first period, when the set value is 1, the execution of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined at the same ratio, whereas when the set value is 6, that is, the set values are 1, 2, The higher the setting is in the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution of the setting suggestion is determined than the reach notice. Therefore, the higher the setting, the easier it is for the setting suggestion to appear. It will be easier to predict.

In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-34, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) in the first period and in the second period. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at different ratios depending on whether the variable display effect (the second variable display effect) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The execution of the reach notice may be determined at the same ratio depending on whether the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period or the variable display effect in the second period. .. By doing so, it is possible to make the player similarly expect the execution of the reach notice in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-34, if the effect is during the variable display of the same number of times, the reach notice is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the form to be determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display during the same number of times, the reach notice is executed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be determined at different rates. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being determined between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect becomes monotonous. It can be suppressed.

(8th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
Whether the variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from the plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the CPU 103 sets the display result as "big hit" or "small hit" in the variable pattern setting process of S111. The part where the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of multiple types using the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not to use)
A variable display means capable of executing variable display according to a determined variable display pattern (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is performing variable display. In the effect processing, a decorative pattern is displayed based on a display result or a variable pattern specified by an effect control command. The part that executes the variable display) and
Predetermined effect determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, in the variable display effect determination process, the effect pattern of the variable display effect is the pattern PT-1 to PT-9. The part that decides one from) and
Based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determining means, the predetermined effect executing means capable of executing the predetermined effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. Setting suggestion or reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9) and
With
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as the fourth embodiment, a portion in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. ),
Based on at least the set value, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the first of a plurality of times is determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-33 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control is performed. The part in which the CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value in the variable display effect in the first period),
At least based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the second number of times after the first number of times is determined (for example, Example). As shown in FIG. 8-33 as No. 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern set in the variable display effect in the second period. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the determination criteria for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect are different between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-33, when determining the effect type of the variable display effect in the first period (the first variable display effect), the variable display is being performed based on the variable display variation pattern. Determine the production type of the production * Isn't it a set value? (Refer to 103SGS314) On the other hand, when determining the effect type of the variable display effect (second variable display effect) in the second period, the variation pattern of the variable display and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 The effect type of the variable display effect is determined based on the value (see 103SGS319 and 103SGS320). In other words, since the judgment criteria for determining the effect type are different between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect It is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being decided by, and it is possible to suppress that the effect during variable display becomes monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is given. Part to be executed at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). As shown in FIG. 8-34 as the fourth embodiment, the pattern PT is obtained when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. -8 or the part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value among the plurality of set values is set and the first set value is different from the first set value. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio as when the two set values are set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first. When executing the variable display effect during the period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are the first. A part in which the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value when the variable display effect is executed in two periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period, it is set. It is set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, in the first period, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, a mode of determining whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according to the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, it is decided whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according only to the set value. You may.

Further, in the second period, an example is exemplified in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be determined at the same ratio depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the second period, an embodiment in which it is determined whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates the embodiment. Not limited to this, in the second period, not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when it is non-reach or small hit, either reach notice or setting suggestion is executed. You may decide whether or not.

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variable display is started for the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach. An example has been made in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period between the timing and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach and the second period after the first period. The effect is not limited to the above, and the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, the variable display of one variable display is simulated multiple times. It may be executed at the timing corresponding to the re-variation of the decorative pattern in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect shown as.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-38 as a modification 2, from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for all the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach / small hit, the normal reach and the super reach. Therefore, the first period before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, the second period after the first period and corresponding to the revariable display period after the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol, and The variable display effect can be executed in the third period, which is later than the second period and corresponds to the revariable display period after the third temporary stop of the decorative symbol.

In the second modification, the first period is exemplified before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first time. The second period is executed according to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the second period is executed in response to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the second decorative symbol, and the third period is executed in response to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. It may be executed according to the revariable display.

In the second modification, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, any of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set for the first period regardless of which the fluctuation pattern is. Variable display is being performed according to whether it is set to. For the second and third periods, variable display is being performed based on the set value only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Executes the process of determining the type of effect.

Specifically, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the fluctuation pattern (the execution of the reach notice is not determined). It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the second period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the third period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is not determined. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set.

In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period and the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach notice is determined in the first period. By setting the ratio for determining the reach notice in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed. Become.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period and the second period and the second. When the variable display effect is executed in the three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variation pattern. That is, since the determination criteria when the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the predetermined effect differs between the first period and the second period or the third period, it is possible to prevent the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

More specifically, the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect is a fluctuation pattern in which the expectation of a big hit increases as the number of revariable displays increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, .... Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first revariable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, and the second revariable display is performed. In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is a possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is executed prior to the reach notice, and the third revariation is performed. In the third period corresponding to the display, since the fluctuation pattern has a high possibility of super reach, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

By doing so, it is possible to suggest the setting while suppressing the frequent occurrence of reach notice and the decrease in the reliability of the reach notice in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by one or two pseudo continuous effects. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big hit from being lowered due to the frequent occurrence of setting suggestions in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by three pseudo-continuous effects.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period when the jackpot reliability is the lowest, the setting suggestion is preferable because the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the second period and the third period when the jackpot reliability is higher than the first period, the execution of the reach notice is set according to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach than the suggestion. Since the decision is given priority, the player's expectation for the big hit can be suitably increased.

In the second modification, the mode in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 100% is illustrated in the first period, but the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period. If so, it does not have to determine the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100%. Further, in the second period, the embodiment in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice is illustrated, but the execution of the reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. Further, in the third period, the form in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100% is illustrated, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate higher than the setting suggestion, the reach notice is announced. The execution does not have to be determined at a 100% rate.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, and in the second period and the third period, the fluctuation pattern is determined. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to whether is normal reach or super reach is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period and the second period are not limited thereto. Then, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value, and in the third period, the reach notice is executed according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach. May be prioritized over the setting suggestion.

Further, in the present modification 2, the embodiment in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach notice according to the set value is illustrated in the first period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of the present inventions are used. In the first number of times (for example, the first period or the second period), if at least the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the set value, the setting suggestion or the setting suggestion or the change pattern is determined according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern. The reach notice may be decided.

Further, in the second modification, in the second period and the third period, the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern is illustrated. It is not limited, and in the second number (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number among the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or the reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If there is, the setting suggestion or reach notice may be determined according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern.

Further, in Examples 2 to 4, as the variable display effect to be executed in the first period, the setting suggestion is made by making the ratio at which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined higher than the ratio at which the reach notice is determined. Although the embodiment in which execution is prioritized and determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 8-15 as Example 1, the variable display executed in the first period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the setting suggestion may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Further, in the second to fourth embodiments, as the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the reach notice is announced by making the ratio at which the execution of the reach notice is determined higher than the ratio at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although the embodiment in which the execution is prioritized and determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 8-15 as the first embodiment, the variable display executed in the second period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the reach notice may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the variable display effect can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reach notices and setting suggestions are provided. It may be feasible over a variable display (see means 5 of the second invention).

Specifically, the CPU 103 holds and stores information about the variable display whose execution is suspended when the start winning prize occurs (for example, a display result (including a jackpot type) or a random number value for determining a fluctuation pattern). The display result and the fluctuation pattern are pre-read and determined based on the extracted random number value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 can be used. When the pre-reading notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended) can be executed, the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is displayed. A reach notice or a setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for a target change may be executed over a plurality of variable displays until the start.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of images Z1 indicating the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the variable display effect in a variable display of the 103SG277 at a predetermined timing. An example of a mode in which a process of executing a process of destroying and changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the medium effect determination process into images Z2 indicating that the images Z1 are dropped has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and when the operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) by the player is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 is changed at the timing corresponding to the operation. You may let it.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player as described above in the variable display effect, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. As the operation promotion effect for prompting, an operation promotion image (for example, a character image or a button image of "continuous hitting!") May be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B when a specific operation for operating the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated, the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. In that case, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be terminated without giving a reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, the player who knows the specific motion can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

As an operation promotion effect for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation validity period of the push button 31B, an operation promotion image for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the variable display effect is executed without displaying the operation promotion image in the display area of the image display device 5 in which the variable display effect is executed. Even if the operation promotion effect is executed by emitting light from a light emitting unit built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. Good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific movement or the player who notices the light emission can see the reach notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result, a mode in which a reach notice suggesting the possibility of reaching is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The predetermined effect, which is the result of suggesting an advantageous state, is a stop symbol notice that suggests at which symbol the variable display symbol stops, a character notice in which a character appears, and a step in which the notice image changes stepwise. Various advance notices can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects that suggest the possibility of a big hit, such as up notices and group notices in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode differs between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (corresponding to the common effect period). It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion unlike the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 for the same period (same timing). In this case, for example, the visibility of the first effect image is made larger than the display area of the second effect image, or the display mode such as emission color, brightness, and contrast is different. Is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, so that the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

When the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image on a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn on the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers and is set. When drawing the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion in the second drawing layer lower than the first drawing layer, the image display device 5 draws the image drawn in the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer. When the images are combined and displayed in duplicate, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image because the first effect image is duplicated in the second effect image. Therefore, it is possible to execute the reach notice in preference to the setting suggestion. Further, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound effects such as the volume and sound quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice corresponds to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the audibility of, that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to hear than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of increasing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only the volume of the sound effect is increased, but also the volume of other sounds such as BGM is decreased to enhance the audibility. May be good. It should be noted that the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output, but the sound sound corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any of the reproduction channels. In, for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the reach notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. At the same time, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (first reproduction channel and second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced in the first reproduction channel By making the volume and sound quality different (improving) from the volume and sound quality of the second production sound reproduced on the second playback channel, the audibility of the first production sound is made higher than the audibility of the second production sound. It is also possible to prioritize the reach notice over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the light emitting mode such as the light emitting color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice is the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the sex, that is, the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to see than the light emitting mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. It should be noted that the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off without being turned on in response to the setting suggestion.

That is, to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result as described in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2. In some cases, not only the execution rate of the reach notice is increased, but also when the effect result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the effect mode such as the reach notice display, sound, and light is more than the setting suggestion effect mode. Including prioritization. Furthermore, executing the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, and sound are such that the effect of the reach notice given to the player is higher than the effect of the setting suggestion given to the player. It also includes performing different production modes such as light, light, and movement of a movable body.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the setting suggestion, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, a mode suggesting which of the set values 1 to 6 is set is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. However, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, for example, the possibility that the set value has been changed or the possibility that the set value has not been changed (deferred) may be suggested.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the jackpot gaming state is applied is exemplified as an example of an advantageous state advantageous for the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize ball is paid out more than in the normal state. High base state (time saving state) where conditions are likely to be satisfied, high probability gaming state (high probability state) with high probability of becoming a big hit game state, high probability low base state (latent probability change state), special reach state (for example) , Super reach, etc.), including the state where the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is a game machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

Further, in the slot machine, the advantageous state for the player is a state in which a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus that increases the winning probability of a small winning combination, or a state in which an operation mode advantageous for the player is notified (for example, an AT (assist time) state). ), A state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is increased (for example, an ART (assist replay time) state) and the like are included.

In addition, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed on a slot machine, a special role such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but the combination of symbols is not aligned and is carried over to the special role. Suggestion effects that suggest the possibility that the combination of corresponding symbols may be derived and displayed, and setting suggestions that suggest the setting values set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (variable display multiple times), or the AT state. It is possible to execute the game over a plurality of games (multiple variable displays) until the AT state or the ART state is won and the AT state or the ART state is started.

(Explanation of Feature 129SG of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the feature unit 129SG of the present embodiment will be described. Although the details will be described later, the feature unit 129SG makes it possible to execute a special suggestion effect for notifying that the player is controlled to the jackpot gaming state during the variable display, and the execution ratio of the special suggestion effect and after the special suggestion effect. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested by the execution ratio of the predetermined effect of. Hereinafter, since the feature unit 129SG partially executes the same processing as the feature unit 103SG, only the processing different from the feature unit 103SG is described in the drawings.

It should be noted that the feature unit 129SG exemplifies a mode in which the contents of the feature unit 103SG (a form suggesting a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the effect pattern of the effect during variable display) are not implemented. The invention is not limited to this, and the content of the feature unit 129SG disclosed below and the content of the feature unit 103SG may be duplicated.

Hereinafter, the feature portion 129SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-10.

First, FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (S171) in the feature unit 129SG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-1, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag indicating that the first variable display start command has been received is set. (129SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is set, it is associated with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer (not shown). The various command data and various flags stored in the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (129SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (129SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set, the process ends, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is set, the second variable display start command receive command buffer (not shown) in the start winning command buffer (not shown) is set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the special figure hold storage are shifted upward by one buffer number (099SGS374). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After executing 129SGS272 or 129SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern from the variation pattern designation command storage area (129SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result) (129SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the variable display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. Store. The variable pattern designation command and the variable display result designation command are commands to be sent to the effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) when the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process (S111).

In this feature unit 129SG, when the received variable display result specification command is a variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols arranged as stop symbols in odd numbers. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is a variable display result specification command corresponding to a non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols ( Big hit design) is decided. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the combination of the decorative symbols (the missed symbols) in which the three symbols are not uniform is determined as the stop symbol.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation pattern from the variation pattern designation command read in 129SGS275, and determines whether or not the identified variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (129SGS277). If the specified fluctuation pattern is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, the process proceeds to 129SGS287, and if the specified fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified. (129SGS278). The effect control CPU 120 receives a set value designation command from the CPU 103 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and stores the set value specified from the set value designation command in the RAM 122. Therefore, in the 129SGS278, the RAM 122 stores the set value. The stored setting value may be specified.

Then, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes a chance-up effect suggesting that the variable display will be a big hit based on the set value specified in 129SGS278 or the variable display result, and the effect pattern of the chance-up effect. The chance-up effect determination process for determining the above is executed (129SGS279).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (129SGS503), and if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable display result. Is a big hit and the presence or absence of execution of the chance-up effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified set value (129SGS304). Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the presence / absence of execution of the chance-up effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the set value specified that the variable display result is out of order (129SGS305).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the 129SGS304 and 129SGS305, as shown in FIG. 9-3, a total of four patterns from the pattern CU-1 to the pattern CU-4 are provided. Among these effect patterns, pattern CU-1 is an effect pattern indicating that the jackpot expectation is low (big hit expectation: low), and pattern CU-2 has a jackpot expectation higher than pattern CU-1 (big hit). Expectation: High) This is a production pattern that indicates that. The pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 are effect patterns for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit. The pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 are both effect patterns for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit, but the effect modes are different.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), in the above-mentioned processing of the 129SGS304, the effect control CPU 120 produces a chance-up effect at a rate of 39% when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. Decided not to execute, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%, and decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, 10 It is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 at a rate of%, and it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4 at a rate of 1%. If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 38%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% with the pattern CU-1. Decided to do, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, 2% It is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4 at the ratio of. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is decided that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 37%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% in the pattern CU-1. Decided to do, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, 3% It is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4 at the ratio of.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 36%, and performs the chance-up effect at a rate of 10%. Decide to execute with pattern CU-1, decide to execute chance-up effect with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and execute chance-up effect with pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%. Is decided, and it is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-4 at a rate of 4%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 35%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% in the pattern CU-1. Decided to do, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, 5% It is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4 at the ratio of. If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, it is determined that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 34%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% with the pattern CU-1. Decided to do, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, 6% It is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4 at the ratio of.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), in the above-mentioned processing of the 129SGS304, the effect control CPU 120 produces a chance-up effect at a rate of 50% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Decided not to execute, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-1 at a rate of 40%, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 10%, 0 It is decided that the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 at a rate of%, and it is decided that the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-4 at a rate of 0%.

That is, in the present feature unit 129SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, when the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-1, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is low (the jackpot expectation is low). At the same time, when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high (the jackpot expectation is high). Further, when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, it is always controlled to the big hit game state. Further, the ratio of the chance-up effect executed in the pattern CU-3 is the same regardless of the set value (uniformly 10%), whereas the ratio of the chance-up effect executed in the pattern CU-4 is It is set to increase as the set value increases. That is, in this feature unit 129SG, the total of the ratio of the chance-up effect executed by the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of the chance-up effect executed by the pattern CU-4 differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In particular, the set value is suggested by the ratio at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-4.

In the chance-up effect of the feature unit 129SG, a character appears on the image display device 5 during the reach effect, and the dialogue content of the character suggests a big hit expectation (see FIG. 9-9). ), The present invention is not limited to this, and if it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation to the player, the production mode of the chance-up effect is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation by the character's dialogue content. It doesn't have to be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the determination ratio of the effect patterns (pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4) for notifying that the jackpot game state is controlled as the chance-up effect in the feature unit 129SG is shown. In addition, 11% when the set value is 1, 12% when the set value is 2, 13% when the set value is 3, 14% when the set value is 4, and 15 when the set value is 5. %, When the set value is 6, it is 16%, which differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the ratio of the chance-up effect executed in the effect pattern for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, and the pachinko game machine It is set to increase as the set value set to 1 increases.

Returning to FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect is determined after the processing of the 129SGS304 or 129SGS305 is executed (129SGS306). If the execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, the chance-up effect determination process is ended, and if the execution of the chance-up effect is decided, the determined effect pattern is memorized (129SGS307) and the chance-up effect is performed. Set the chance-up effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of is decided, and end the chance-up effect execution process.

Returning to FIG. 9-1, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the chance-up effect execution decision flag is set after executing the chance-up effect determination process (129SGS279) (129SGS280). If it is not set, the process proceeds to 129SGS283, and if the chance-up effect execution decision flag is set, a value corresponding to the period until the start of the chance-up effect is set in the chance-up effect start town timer (129SGS281). ), Clear the chance-up effect execution decision flag and proceed to 129SGS283 (129SGS282).

The effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the chance-up effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and the chance-up effect is produced based on the timer-up of the chance-up effect start waiting timer. It suffices to set the process table of the chance up production according to the production pattern. Further, after setting the process table for the chance-up effect, each time the effect process during variable display is executed, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, effect lamp 9, etc.) is adjusted according to the value of the process timer for the chance-up effect. ) To control the chance-up effect.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect jackpot notification effect pattern (pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4) is determined as the process of the 129SGS283. If the execution in the big hit notification effect pattern of the chance-up effect is not decided, the process proceeds to 129SGS288, and if the execution in the big hit notification effect pattern of the chance-up effect is decided, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. The set value suggestion effect determination process (129SGS284) for determining whether or not to execute the set value suggestion effect that suggests the set value and the effect pattern of the set value suggestion effect is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern based on the set value (129SGS312).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the 129SGS 312, as shown in FIG. 9-6, a total of five patterns from the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-5 are provided. Of these patterns SS-1 to pattern SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests that the set value may be an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 has an even number of set values (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility of 2, 4, 6), and the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the set value is equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5) closer to the odd number. Suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

The patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is said that the degree of expectation is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5 and It is said that the expectation of being 6 is high.

In the feature unit 129SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high. However, the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set by setting the setting values 1 and 2 to the low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 to the intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 to the high setting.

In the process of the 129SGS 312 described above, as shown in FIG. 9-7, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 does not perform the set value suggestion effect at a rate of 90%. Decided to execute, decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-1 at a rate of 7.15%, and execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 2.35%. It was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-3 at a rate of 0.36%, and to execute the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0.14%. , It is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 85%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS at a rate of 3.21%. Decided to execute with -1, and decided to execute the set value suggestion effect with pattern SS-2 at a rate of 10.73%, and perform the set value suggestion effect with pattern SS-3 at a rate of 0.21%. It is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0.85%, and the set value suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. To determine. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS at a rate of 11.45%. Decided to execute with -1, decided to execute the set value suggestion effect with pattern SS-2 at a rate of 2.85%, and set value suggestion effect with pattern SS-3 at a rate of 4.28%. It is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-4 at a rate of 1.42%, and the set value suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. To determine.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the set value suggestion effect is not executed at a rate of 75%, and sets it at a rate of 3.57%. It was decided to execute the value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1, and it was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-2 at a rate of 14.30%, and the set value suggestion was performed at a rate of 1.78%. Decided to execute the effect in pattern SS-3, decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 5.35%, and set value suggestion effect in pattern SS at a rate of 0%. Decide to run at -5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS at a rate of 4.28%. Decided to execute with -1, decided to execute the set value suggestion effect with pattern SS-2 at a rate of 8.57%, and set value suggestion effect with pattern SS-3 at a rate of 10.73%. It is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6.42%, and the set value suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. To determine. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 65%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS at a rate of 10.00%. Decided to execute with -1, and decided to execute the set value suggestion effect with pattern SS-2 at a rate of 5.00%, and perform the set value suggestion effect with pattern SS-3 at a rate of 5.00%. Decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 12.50%, and execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 2.5%. Decide to do.

As described above, in this feature unit 129SG, it is suggested that the set value is one of 1 to 4 by executing the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the set value suggestion is made. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in the pattern SS-3 or the pattern SS-4. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the feature unit 129SG is set so that the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the rate at which the execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined. There is.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect in the feature unit 129SG are effects that can be executed during the execution period of the reach effect during the variable display of the super reach. Further, the set value suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed only when the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 that notifies the jackpot as described above, and is after the chance-up effect. It is feasible.

Further, the setting value suggestion effect in the feature unit 129SG suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 by displaying the images of any or all of the plurality of characters in the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and if it suggests a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the effect mode of the set value suggestion effect is to be performed (see FIG. 9-10). Does not have to display the images of any or all of the plurality of characters in the image display device 5.

Returning to FIG. 9-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been determined to execute the set value suggestion effect after executing the process of 129SG312 (129SGS313). When it is decided not to execute the set value suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and when it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, the determined effect pattern is memorized (129SGS314). The set value suggestion effect execution decision flag is set to end the set value suggestion effect determination process (129SGS315).

Returning to FIG. 9-1, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value suggestion effect execution decision flag is set after executing the process of 129SGS283 (129SGS285). If the set value suggestion effect execution decision flag is not set, the process proceeds to 129SGS287, and if the set value suggestion effect execution decision flag is set, the set value suggestion effect start wait timer is set to the set value suggestion effect start time. (129SGS286), the set value suggestion effect execution decision flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to 129SGS288 (129SGS287).

The effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the set value suggestion effect start wait timer by -1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and sets a value based on the timer up of the set value suggestion effect start wait timer. Setting value according to the effect pattern of the suggestion effect The process table of the suggestion effect may be set. In addition, after setting the process table of the set value suggestion effect, each time the effect process during variable display is executed, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, effect lamp) according to the value of the process timer of the set value suggestion effect. 9 etc.) may be controlled to execute the set value suggestion effect.

In the 129SGS288, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the fluctuation pattern. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (129SGS289).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (129SGS290). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (129SGS291). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (129SGS292). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (129SGS293).

Next, the production modes of the chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10. First, when it is decided to execute the chance-up effect at the start of the variable display of the super reach, the image display device 5 is after reaching the reach, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) and 9-10 (B). The reach production of Super Reach is started at. Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the reach effect, a character is displayed at the lower part of the image display device 5 as a chance-up effect, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (C) to 9-9 (F). At the same time, the dialogue corresponding to the effect pattern is displayed as the dialogue of the character.

In particular, when the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, the variable display result is a big hit by the dialogue displayed on the image display device 5, and the big hit game state is controlled after the variable display is completed. It is notified that it will be done.

Further, when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 during the reach effect of the super reach, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to 9-10 (F), After a specific period has elapsed after the chance-up effect is completed, an image of any or all of the plurality of characters is displayed as a set value suggestion effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (B) to 9-10 (E), when the set value suggestion effect is executed in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4, the image display device. In 5, images of different characters are displayed. Further, when the set value suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5 (when the set value suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode for notifying that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6). Displays all characters that can be displayed on the image display device 5 when the set value suggestion effect is executed in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4 in the image display device 5. Therefore, in the feature unit 129SG, the player is made to pay attention to which character's image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a setting value suggestion effect, and the number of character images displayed on the image display device 5 is increased. It is possible to draw the attention of the players and improve the game entertainment.

As described above, in the feature unit 129SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that when the variable display result is a big hit, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state. It is possible to execute the chance-up effect with the effect pattern (Pattern CU-3 or Pattern CU-4) to be performed, and execute the chance-up effect with the effect pattern for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state. The ratio varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested to the player by the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the effect pattern notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state. It is possible to improve the interest of up-production.

It should be noted that the feature unit 129SG exemplifies a mode in which the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 in the chance-up effect are the specific suggestion effects in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The specific suggestion effect is "a specific display result is displayed (derivative display) on a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) when a specific display result (variable display result is a big hit). ), As long as it is an effect of notifying that the control is performed in an advantageous state, the effect mode is not particularly limited.

In addition, in this feature unit 129SG, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more the chance-up effect is controlled to the big hit game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the larger the chance-up effect is in the jackpot gaming state. The ratio of execution in the effect pattern for notifying that the control is performed may be low.

Further, in the feature unit 129SG, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the effect control CPU 120 is a pattern CU-3 which is an effect pattern for notifying that the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the jackpot game state during the reach effect of the super reach. Alternatively, after executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4, the set value suggestion effect can be further executed, and the execution ratio of the set value suggestion effect is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. 9-7. Since the set value is set to be higher as the set value is set, the player can be noticed that the set value suggestion effect is executed after the chance-up effect, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 129SG, the special suggestion effect in the present invention is the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 of the chance-up effect, and the predetermined effect in the present invention is a set value suggestion effect different from the chance-up effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special suggestion effect and the predetermined effect in the present invention may be the same effect mode, or the special suggestion effect in the present invention. The predetermined effect may be executed as a series of effects. Further, as the predetermined effect having a different effect mode from the special suggestion effect, it may be applied to an effect that is not necessarily a notification that the game is controlled to a big hit game state, such as a reach effect of super reach.

Further, in the feature unit 129SG, the chance-up effect can be executed by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the chance-up effect can be performed. After executing in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, by executing the set value suggestion effect, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in both the chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect. Although the forms that can be suggested are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and among these chance-up effects and set value suggestion effects, only the chance-up effects can be executed. It may be possible to suggest the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by the chance-up effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, as the effect pattern of the chance-up effect, the two effect patterns of the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 are controlled to the jackpot gaming state. It is provided as an effect pattern to notify, and the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 is 10%, which is common regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the chance-up effect is increased. The ratio at which the effect is executed in the pattern CU-4 differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, in this feature unit 129SG, since the set value is suggested by the ratio at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-4, the chance-up effect is the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4. Since the player can pay attention to which one is executed, the interest of the suggestion production can be improved.

In the feature unit 129SG, as the effect pattern for the chance-up effect, two effect patterns, the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4, are provided as an effect pattern for notifying that the jackpot game state is controlled. The present invention is not limited to this, and three or more effect patterns for notifying that the jackpot game state is controlled may be provided as the effect pattern for the chance-up effect. Further, among the effect patterns for notifying that the jackpot game state is controlled, only the execution ratio of some of the effect patterns may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The execution ratios of all the effect patterns may be different depending on the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the feature unit 129SG, during the variable display of 1, after executing the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 of the chance-up effect as the special suggestion effect in the present invention, the set value suggestion effect is performed as the predetermined effect in the present invention. Although a feasible form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 129SG-1, as shown in FIG. 9-11, it is notified that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. After executing with one of the effect patterns (pattern CU-3 in the example shown in FIG. 9-11), the other effect pattern (FIG. 9-11) notifies that the chance-up effect is further controlled to the jackpot game state. In the example shown, the pattern CU-4) may be used.

It should be noted that, during the variable display of 1, after executing the chance-up effect with one effect pattern for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state, the other for notifying that the chance-up effect is further controlled for the jackpot game state. When it is possible to execute the effect pattern, the content to be notified to the player may differ depending on the number of times the chance-up effect is executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the chance-up effect is executed only once in the pattern CU-3 during the variable display of 1, only the jackpot gaming state is controlled as in the feature unit 129SG. If the chance-up effect is executed twice in the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, in addition to the notification that the jackpot game state is controlled, the pachinko game machine 1 It may be notified that the set value set in is within a predetermined range (for example, a range of 4 to 6).

By doing so, the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, so that the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 4 to 6. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is either (in other words, the number of times the chance-up effect is executed in the effect pattern that notifies that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state during the variable display of 1. Therefore, the player can pay attention to whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6), so that the gaming interest can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 9-11, after executing the chance-up effect as a special suggestion effect in one of the effect patterns for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state during the variable display, the chance-up effect is further performed in the jackpot game. In the form that can be executed by the other effect pattern that notifies that the state is controlled, the chance-up effect executed first corresponds to the special suggestion effect in the present invention, and the chance-up effect executed later corresponds to the present invention. Corresponds to a special production.

In the present modification 129SG-1, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, both chance-up effects are produced. Although the embodiment in which the execution periods do not overlap is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the execution periods of these two chance-up effects may overlap. That is, in the present invention, when the special suggestion effect and the special effect are executed within a specific period, the execution period of the special suggestion effect and the execution period of the special effect do not overlap, and the execution period of the special suggestion effect. It includes both those that overlap at least partly with the execution period of the special effect.

Further, in the present modification 129SG-1, as shown in FIG. 9-11, a mode in which the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and both chance-up effects may be performed over a plurality of variable displays. That is, in the present invention, when the special suggestion effect and the special effect are executed within a specific period, both chance up effects are executed during one variable display and both chances are performed over a plurality of variable displays. Includes both those for which up effects are performed. When both chance-up effects are executed during the variable display of 1, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested by the number of times the chance-up effects are executed during the variable display of 1. , When both chance-up effects are executed during a plurality of variable displays, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested by the number of times the chance-up effects are executed during the plurality of variable displays. do it.

Further, in the present modification 129SG-1, if the chance-up effect is executed only once in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, it is only notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. , The mode in which the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified within a predetermined range by executing the chance-up effect twice in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 has been illustrated. The pattern CU-3 is not limited to this, and the pattern CU-3 is notified that it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is within a predetermined range (for example, 1). , 2 and 6), and the pattern CU-4 is notified that it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is set to the pattern CU. It may be an effect pattern for notifying that the range is different from -3 (for example, the range is 4 to 6). By doing so, the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, which more accurately suggests the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. (In the above example, the pattern CU-3 notifies that the set value is 1, 2, or 6 and the pattern CU-4 indicates that the set value is any of 4 to 6. By notifying, it is confirmed that the set value is 6).

Furthermore, when the chance-up effect is executed twice in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, whether or not the effect periods of both chance-up effects overlap and both chances are increased. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested according to the length or the like in which the production periods of the production overlap.

Further, in the feature unit 129SG, a mode in which a chance-up effect can be executed is illustrated as a suggestion effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion effect in the present invention is an effect mode. It is possible to execute a step-up effect in which the step-up effect changes stepwise, and the content to be suggested may differ depending on the number of times (number of steps) the effect mode of the step-up effect changes.

For example, as a modification 129SG-2, as shown in FIG. 9-12, when the step-up effect can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, and the step-up effect is executed only in the first stage. Is out of non-reach, normal reach if executed up to the second stage, super reach (big hit expectation: weak) if executed up to the third stage, super reach (big hit expectation) if executed up to the fourth stage : Strong) is set to suggest each.

Further, when the step-up effect is executed up to the fifth stage, it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and when it is executed up to the sixth stage, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is within a predetermined range (for example). It is set to notify each of the ranges from 4 to 6). In this case, the fifth stage of the step-up effect corresponds to the special stage in the present invention, and the sixth stage of the step-up effect corresponds to the specific set value suggestion stage in the present invention. By doing so, when it is notified that the step-up effect is executed up to the fifth stage and controlled to the jackpot game state, the step-up effect is further executed up to the sixth stage to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the range of the set value is notified, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present modification 129SG-2, a mode in which the step-up effect is executed as the suggestion effect in the present invention is illustrated, but as the step-up effect, the effect mode of the step-up effect is the first stage to the second stage. In addition to the ones that change in order from the third stage to the fourth stage, etc., the ones that change to the fourth stage without going through the first to second stages and the third stage (so-called step skipping) are executed. It may be possible. In addition, when the step skipping is executed as the step-up effect in this way, when the execution up to the sixth step (the step suggesting the set value) is decided, the target of the step skipping is the first step to the fourth step. On the other hand, by executing the 6th stage after passing through the 5th stage to notify that the jackpot game state is always controlled, the 6th stage is notified to be controlled to the big hit game state. It may be possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood at the stage of doing so. Further, in the case of executing the step skipping, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested depending on which stage the step skipping is executed.

Further, in the modified example 129SG-1, the chance-up effect can be executed a plurality of times by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4, which are effect patterns for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the big hit game state, and these chance-up effects can be performed. Illustrated a form in which the content suggested differs depending on the number of times the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU4 was executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 9-13 is shown as a modified example 129SG-3. As shown in, instead of the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4, the chance-up effect can be executed multiple times by the pattern CU-2, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, and these chance-up effects are the pattern CU. The suggested content may differ depending on the number of times it is executed in -2.

Specifically, the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, the period from the reach to the start of the reach effect of the super reach, and the variable display after the start of the reach effect of the super reach It is possible to execute the chance-up effect once for each period until the end (it is possible to execute the chance-up effect three times during one variable display), and if the chance-up effect is executed only once, a big hit is expected. It suggests that the degree is high, suggests that if the chance-up effect is executed twice, it will be controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the chance-up effect is executed three times, it is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be set to notify that the set value is in a predetermined range (for example, a range of 4 to 6). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the case where the suggestion content is different depending on the number of times the pattern CU-2 is executed in this way, for example, when the variable display result is specified at the start of the variable display and the variable display result is a miss or a small hit. Determines the execution in the chance-up effect pattern CU-2 only once. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a big hit, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is further specified. When the set value is any of 1 to 5, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern CU-2 is determined once or twice, and when the set value is 6, the chance-up effect pattern The execution in CU-2 may be decided to be one to three times.

In addition, in the case where the suggested content is different depending on the number of times the pattern CU-2 is executed in this way, the number of times the pattern CU-2 is executed for the chance-up effect is first determined by lottery, and the variable display result or pachinko is used. The number of executions may be redetermined according to the set value set in the gaming machine 1.

Further, in the feature unit 129SG, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the effect pattern of the chance-up effect is determined when the variable display result becomes a big hit, it is controlled to the big hit game state. While the pattern CU-3, which is the effect pattern to be notified, is determined at a common ratio (uniformly 10%) regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is notified that it is controlled to the jackpot game state. By determining the pattern CU-4, which is an effect pattern, at a different ratio according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect pattern for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state is used. Although a mode in which the execution ratio differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 9-14 shows a modified example 129SG-4. As shown, the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the effect pattern notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state (the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4). The ratio (total with the ratio to be executed) is set to the common ratio (15% in the example shown in FIG. 9-14) regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while being set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4 may be different depending on the set value. By doing so, the player sets the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the execution ratio of the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4, which are the effect patterns for notifying that the pachinko game state is controlled. Since it is possible to suggest to, it is possible to improve the interest of the chance-up production.

Further, the feature unit 129SG exemplifies a form in which the chance-up effect suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ratio of execution in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be able to execute a setting value change suggestion effect indicating that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. In particular, when the setting value change suggestion effect is executed on the next day or the like when a low setting value is suggested by the chance-up effect or the like in the pachinko game machine 1, a high setting value is set for the pachinko game machine 1 for the player. Since it can be expected that the player is playing, the player's game can be promoted.

Further, the feature unit 129SG exemplifies a form in which the set value suggestion effect may be executed after the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4. The production period of the above may be set longer than the production period of the chance-up production. By doing so, as proof that the pachinko game machine 1 in which the high setting value is set has played the game, the period during which the player takes an image of the setting value suggestion effect with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone can be set. Can be secured. Further, in the case where the player secures the period for shooting the image of the set value suggestion effect by setting the effect period of the set value suggestion effect longer than the effect period of the chance up effect, the chance is further increased. After the effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, the effect suggesting that the set value suggestion effect is executed can be executed, so that the player who recognizes the effect suggests the set value. The mobile terminal may be ready by the start of the production.

Further, in the feature unit 129SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 can be determined as the effect pattern of the chance-up effect regardless of the big hit type. The present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up effect is produced only when the jackpot type most advantageous to the player in the variable special chart (for example, jackpot C in the case of the jackpot type shown in FIGS. 8-9) is determined. Pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4 may be determinable as the effect pattern of.

Further, the feature unit 129SG exemplifies a form in which the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 of the chance-up effect are used as a special suggestion effect for notifying that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. The special suggestion effect is not limited to, but it is possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed by a combination of jackpots (so-called full rotation reach effect), and a pseudo-continuous effect in which the temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative pattern are repeated. If so, as the pseudo continuous effect, a temporary stop and revariable display up to the maximum number of decorative symbols, and a hold display notice effect for notifying the variable display result in the display mode of the hold storage display for the variable display that has not been executed yet are executed. If possible, display the hold storage display in gold, rainbow colors, etc., emit light in a mode of notifying the jackpot of the game effect lamp 9, sound output notifying the jackpot from the speakers 8L, 8R, and a specific movable body. It may be an operation or the like.

Further, if it is possible to execute these full rotation reach, pseudo continuous effect, hold memory display effect, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8 and 8R, operation of the movable body, etc. as special suggestion effects, these multiple effects It is also possible to suggest different setting values by combining the special suggestion effects of the above and different the production modes of the special suggestion effects to be executed later.

For example, after it is notified that the temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the revariable display are executed up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 4 times) as a pseudo continuous effect and controlled to the jackpot game state, the full rotation reach effect is executed. If the variable display direction of the decorative symbol is directed from above to downward as the full rotation reach effect, it is notified that the set value is one of 1 to 3, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed as the full rotation reach effect. If the direction is from left to right, it notifies that the set value is any of 4 to 6, and as the full rotation reach effect, the variable display direction of the decorative pattern is an image display device seen from the player. If the setting value is from the back side to the front side of 5, the set value is notified.

Further, for example, after being notified that the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to the big hit game state by emitting light in rainbow colors at the start of the variable display, if the melody A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the set value is set. It notifies that it is any of 1 to 3, and if the melody B is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, it notifies that the set value is any of 4 to 6, and the melody C is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. If so, it is notified that the set value is 6.

Further, for example, after being notified that the hold memory display is displayed in rainbow colors and the variable display result corresponding to the hold memory display becomes a big hit (it is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the variable display). , The movable body A operates by the end of the variable display that becomes the big hit to notify that the set value is one of 1 to 3, and the movable body B by the end of the variable display that becomes the big hit. Notifies that the set value is any of 4 to 6 by operating, and the set value is 6 by operating both the movable body A and the movable body B by the end of the variable display that becomes the big hit. Notify that.

Further, the feature unit 129SG exemplifies a form in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested in both the chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect, but the setting suggested in the chance-up effect. Since the value and the set value suggested in the set value suggestion effect are individually determined, it is conceivable that these two suggestion contents do not match depending on the effect mode of the chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect. Therefore, for example, when the set value is not suggested in the chance-up effect (when the execution in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 is not decided), the set value is suggested only by the set value suggestion effect. The setting value may be suggested (determined to be executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4) in the chance-up effect only when the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined. In addition, whether or not the clerk of the amusement park suggests the set value as a chance-up effect by using the effect adjustment function provided in the pachinko game machine 1 and the ratio of execution / non-execution of the set value suggestion effect are changed. It may be possible.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. ), Which is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of the set values.
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the chance-up effect) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state has executed the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-2. It is equipped with a part that executes the effect processing during variable display later).
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means can execute a special suggestion effect for notifying that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs a chance-up effect in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU). Part to be executed in -4),
The execution rate of the special suggestion effect differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (A)), the effect pattern of the chance-up effect based on the variable display result being a big hit. The part where the total of the ratio determined by the pattern CU-3 and the ratio determined by the pattern CU-4 differs according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1),
further,
A change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) that changes the display mode of the specific display.
It is provided with a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone effect of a display change high probability zone).
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. Examples thereof include game machines whose modes are easily changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to this feature, it is possible to suggest the set value set in the game machine to the player by the execution ratio of the special suggestion effect that notifies that the player is controlled to the advantageous state. Can be improved. Further, since it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, the interest of the game will be improved.

Further, the set value may be associated with the change effect or the specific effect. For example, when the setting value of 6 is set to be advantageous, the execution rate of the change effect or the specific effect may be higher than that of the case where the disadvantageous 1 is set. By doing so, the set value can be estimated from the execution ratio of the change effect or the specific effect, and the interest is improved.
In addition, if the suggestion of the set value is performed by a plurality of elements (two elements, the execution ratio of the special suggestion effect and the execution ratio of the change effect and the specific effect), the multiple elements are advantageous for the player. When a value is suggested, the player can be more confident that the setting value is favorable to the player, even if one factor does not suggest a setting value favorable to the player. If an advantageous setting value is suggested by the above factors, the player can maintain a sense of expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition, it can be displayed only when a plurality of specific effects are provided (blue display zone, yellow display zone, red display zone) and the set value is a specific value (for example, 4 to 6 which is 4 or more is set). A specific effect (zone displayed in red) may be provided. By doing so, it becomes possible to draw more attention to the specific production.

Further, the suggestive effect and the specific effect may be associated with each other. For example, although the suggestion effect and the specific effect are not executed at the same time, only the special suggestion effect may be executed at the same time as the specific effect. By doing so, it becomes possible to execute the special suggestion effect, which is more advantageous, without reducing the execution frequency.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine capable of improving the interest, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display. ,
A change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) that changes the display mode of the specific display.
It is provided with a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone effect of a display change high probability zone).
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. Examples thereof include game machines whose modes are easily changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)

(Explanation of feature 112IW)
Next, the feature portion 112IW will be described. The setting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 112IW can be changed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose settings can be changed, it is possible to set any of a plurality of set values, and it is possible to control the advantageous state (big hit game state) at different ratios according to the set set values. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the other feature unit may also be configured so that the setting can be changed in the same manner as the feature unit 112IW. First, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 112IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 112IW003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into the lock and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 112IW003 and the glass door frame. The 112IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 112IW201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state are changed. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is housed in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 112IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 112IW051. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the feature portion 112IW, the form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but one key may be used in combination.

Further, the substrate case 112IW201 is provided with a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the feature unit 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. There is a risk that the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3, a substrate including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Further, the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the substrate case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. As a result, the right side portion of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating them, the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the operation becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW, when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. While the state is maintained, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) of the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by allowing an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate to enter between the gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the machines and the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since there is a possibility that the setting value may be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 112IW052, the setting switch with the setting key 112IW051 by the security cover 112IW500A while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. By maintaining the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is regulated, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

In the feature unit 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables such as the determination table shown in FIG. 10-4, which is prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), and FIG. In addition to the display result judgment table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C), the jackpot type judgment table (not shown), the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), and the general drawing. A display result determination table (not shown), a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW has a configuration in which the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to increase the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3 the advantage increases stepwise.

(Display result judgment table)
10-4 (A) to 10-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In the case of, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case of "2" (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). To do.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) to 10-4 (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) to 10-4 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

The feature unit 112IW provides a total of three set values of 1 to 3 as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

Further, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player (the jackpot probability increases), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this feature unit 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (large winning opening, second major winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform aggregation and calculate various winning information such as the continuous ratio, the winning ratio, and the base based on the aggregation.

Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 includes a 4-digit display unit. The display unit of each digit is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments drawing the shape of "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments.

The display contents are displayed on the first-digit display unit and the second-digit display unit, and the numerical values are displayed as percentages on the third-digit display unit and the fourth-digit display unit. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in display No. 5, a base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No. 6, a base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the first-digit display unit and the second-digit display unit, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit. When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display unit and the fourth digit display unit, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. When is displayed, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the first digit display unit and the second digit display unit, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. Is displayed with "A7." On the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the total of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display unit and the fourth digit display unit.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the one digit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the eye display and the second digit display. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. When it is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit.

Furthermore, the display of these short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, and the setting values set at that time are It is possible to sequentially change the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2.

In the feature unit 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this and displays. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only a numerical value of 1 or only a numerical value of any 2 of these ratios, combination ratios, and bases.

In addition, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the winning ratio, and the base. Good.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 10-5 to 10-7 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 112IW. In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the effect control means to start for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) starts when the power supply to the game machine is started. Set the timer (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation waiting timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the activation of the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 112IWS006 are executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processes are executed. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is a value at the time of shipment from the factory (for example, a value other than "0" or a possible set value) (step 112IWS006). If the factory default settings are used (step 112IWS006; Yes), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; No), that is, if the set value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. Whether or not it is determined (step 112 IWS008). In step 112 IWS008, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; Yes), that is, if a power failure occurs during the setting value change and the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 112IW029 to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating that a RAM error has occurred.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (a state in which the door (game machine frame 112IW003) is open) (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA01). When the RAM clear flag is on, the RAM clear process for clearing the stored contents of the RAM 102 is executed after the process related to the setting change is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 AKSA03.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is off (when the door is closed) (N in step 112IWS011) or when the setting key 112IW051 is off (N in step 112IWS012), from the clear switch. When the output signal of is off (N in step 112IWS013), the process proceeds to the loop process without shifting to the step 120AKSA01. Before entering the loop process, the control of transmitting the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (the process of step 112IWS010) may be executed.

When the processes of steps 112IWS006 to S013 are executed, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 112IW (N in steps 112IWS007 and S008), or the factory default settings remain (step 112IWS007, S008). In the case of 112IWS006 Y), if a power failure occurs during the setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 open. On condition that, the set value after step 120 AKSA03 can be changed, and then the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, unless the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA02).

After the processing of step 120AKSA02 or if the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017).

If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03). Here, when the setting key 112IW051 is on, the process for confirming the setting (setting confirmation process) or the process for changing the setting (setting change) depends on the state of the RAM clear flag (that is, on / off of the clear switch). Process) is executed. The error processing may be executed when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned off while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed.

When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03; Yes), a setting change start command indicating that the setting change process is started is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA04). When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA03; No), a setting confirmation start command indicating that the setting confirmation process is started is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA05).

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting change command or the setting confirmation command, it controls to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed (for example, the image display device 5 displays a predetermined image or displays the predetermined image. A predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is a factory default value (for example, “0” or the like) (step 120AKSA06). If it is the factory default setting value (step 120AKSA06; Yes), the set value is set to "1" (step 120AKSA07). In step 120 AKSA07, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated to "1".

In step 120 AKSA07, when the set value is the factory default value, the set value is set to "1" as the initial value, but other set values may be set as the initial value. Also, when there is a RAM error error such as when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 or when the backup data is not normal (for example, when the process of step 112IWS010 is executed), the set value is set to the initial value "1". You may try to do it. In this case, when the process of step 112IWS010 is executed (when step 112IWS006; Yes, step 112IWS007; No, or step 112IWS008; No), the RAM error flag is set, and in step 120AKSA06, the RAM error flag is set. May be determined whether or not is on.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 120AKSA06; No), or after executing the process of step 120AKSA07, the CPU 103 displays the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 120AKSA08). ).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA09). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA09; Yes), the setting changing flag is set (step 120AKSA10).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is on (step 120AKSA11). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is on (step 120AKSA11; Yes), the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated (step 120AKSA12). The set value is updated every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated (pressed). For example, if the set value is "1", it is updated to "2", if the set value is "2", it is updated to "3", and if the set value is "3", it is updated to "1". Just update. A specific setting value may be specified by operating the setting changeover switch 112IW052.

If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA09; No), it means that the setting has been confirmed, so the process related to the setting change is not executed. In this case, or when the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not on (step 120AKSA11; No), it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is turned off after the processing of step 120AKSA12 is executed. (Step 120 AKSA13).

If the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 remains ON (step 120AKSA13; No), the process returns to step 120AKSA08 to continue the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. When the set value is updated in step 120AKSA12, the process of step 120AKSA08 is executed again, so that the updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

When the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is off (step 120AKSA13; Yes), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14; Yes), the setting changing flag is reset (step 120AKSA15), and a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA16). ).

When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA14; No), a setting confirmation end command indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA17).

After that, the display of the set value on the display monitor 112IW029 is erased (step 120AKSA18), and the set value command indicating the set value is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). The setting value command may be sent only when the setting value is updated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA19). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120 AKSA19; Yes), the RAM clear process is executed (step 120 AKSA 20). In the RAM clear process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear processing, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the connection ratio and the combination Performance display information such as ratio and base, and set value information are not cleared and are retained.

After that, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S9 (step 112IWS033).

When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120 AKSA19; No), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112 IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as in step S6. Do. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S7 (step 112IWS023).

After the process of step 112IWS033 or step 112IWS023, the process proceeds to the process of step 112IWS034. The processing of steps 112IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

In step 120AKSA08, the set value may be displayed on the image display device 5. Then, the subsequent processing may be executed by using the image display device 5.

Further, during the execution of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are set to a mode in which they are not displayed during the normal game (for example, a mode in which all segments of the 7-segment LED are turned on or blinked). May be good. By notifying the player using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation state or the setting change state is preferable. The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may be different in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

If the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change process, the setting change process is executed again and the updated setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) unless the setting change is completed. , You may make an error. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, the setting change flag (which is not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM as the backup RAM that stores the setting value, and the setting change is performed at the end of the setting change process. When the flag is turned off and a process other than the setting change process (for example, the game control main process) is executed, if the setting change flag is on, an error occurs. As described above, in a situation where the setting change process does not proceed normally in the middle, the clerk of the amusement park may mistakenly think that the setting change has been completed even though it has not been completed. In such a case, it is possible to guarantee the reliable completion of the setting change by setting an error if the setting change is not completed.

Further, in step 120AKSA08, the current set value is read from the backup RAM and the set value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not performed normally, the image display device 5 is displayed with information indicating that an error occurs, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are displayed in a mode different from that during the normal game. (For example, if all the segments of the 7-segment LED are turned off, or if all the lights are turned on during the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, all the blinking may occur).

FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (steps 120AKSA08 to 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (steps 120AKSA08, 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step 120AKSA20, etc.) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step 112IWS024) is executed if the clear switch is off. Is executed.

In this embodiment, in the game control main processing shown in FIGS. 10-5 to 10-7, branching is performed according to the state of the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch (RAM clear flag) while sharing some of the processing. In, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, the initialization process, or the recovery process has been executed, but each of them may be modularized and executed as an individual process.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (A) and 10-9 (B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. If the big winning opening is being opened during a big hit game or the like at the timing when the power is turned off, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (D), the CPU 103 each time it detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (E), the CPU 103 sets the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like. Store (update storage) in the backup area of. At this time, the CPU 103 tells the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio of the set values set at that time. Display base 1 and base 2. Also, RAM
When the hold storage is stored in the backup area of 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 10-9 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear process is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory of the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a lottery for determining the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (F), the CPU 103 displays "EE" on the display monitor 112IW029 based on the occurrence of an error in the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored. It is possible to make it.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. As the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 112IW) or the most advantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in the case of this feature unit 112IW) may be displayed.

(Explanation of feature 53AK)
Subsequently, the feature unit 53AK will be described. The setting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 53AK can be changed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose settings can be changed, it is possible to set any of a plurality of set values, and it is possible to control the advantageous state (big hit game state) at different ratios according to the set set values. In the feature unit 53AK, it is possible to execute a notice effect that gives notice / suggests that the display result will be a big hit (controlled in the big hit game state) during the execution of the variable display.

When the variable display is started, the advance notice effect is determined in the variable display start setting process of step S171 shown in FIG. 7 depending on whether or not the display result is a big hit. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose setting can be changed, the larger the setting value, the higher the probability of a big hit. The notice effect (especially the highly reliable notice effect that becomes a big hit) is easy to be executed when the display result becomes a big hit, so if the execution presence or absence is determined at an equal ratio regardless of the set value, the set value The higher the value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect. In this embodiment, the reliability refers to the jackpot reliability, and refers to the ratio of jackpots when the advance notice effect is executed.

Therefore, there is a risk that the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may differ from the intended ones due to blurring due to the set value, or the reliability may change and the player may be confused. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 53AK, by adjusting (changing) the execution rate of the advance notice effect according to the set value, at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect is the same or substantially the same range. Adjusted within. As a result, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect can be intended, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the advance notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the set value from being unnecessarily suggested depending on the execution frequency of the advance notice effect.

In addition, when adjusting the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect, it may be difficult to completely match the ratio after the decimal point. Therefore, the invention according to the feature portion 53AK includes not only those having the same appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect but also those adjusted within substantially the same range. It should be noted that if the range is substantially the same, the same effect as in the case of the same can be obtained. The substantially same range may be within a predetermined range, within a predetermined error range (for example, plus or minus 5%, etc.), or the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect perceived by the player. May be within substantially the same range so that they are perceived to be the same.

FIG. 11-1 is a diagram showing an example of the execution rate, the appearance rate, and the reliability of the notice X as the notice effect of the feature unit 53AK. FIG. 11-1 (A) shows an example in the case where the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X are not adjusted. In this embodiment, three stages of "1" to "3" are provided as set values. As shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), in this embodiment, the jackpot probability a is "1/300" when the set value is "1", "1/250" when the set value is "2", and the set value. In the case of "3", it is "1/200". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit is "50/100" regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A (= jackpot probability a × execution ratio b) when the notice X is executed and becomes a big hit is “1/600” when the set value is “1” and the set value “2”. In the case of, it is "1/500", and in the case of the set value "3", it is "1/400".

The loss probability c (= 1-big hit probability a) is "299/300" when the set value is "1", "249/250" when the set value is "2", and "199" when the set value is "3". / 200 ". The execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "1/100". Therefore, the rate (ratio to total variation) B (= loss probability c × execution rate d) at which the notice X is executed and becomes a loss is about “1/100” at any set value.

The appearance rate C (= A + B) of the notice X in total variation is "7/600" when the set value is "1", "6/500" when the set value is "2", and "5" when the set value is "3". It is "/ 400". The reliability D (= A / C) of the notice X is "1/7" (about 14%) when the set value is "1" and "1/6" (about 17%) when the set value is "2". ), When the set value is "3", it is "1/5" (20%).

In this way, when the execution rate of the notice effect (notice X) is the same regardless of the set value without adjustment, the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect. In particular, when the reliability is based on the case of the set value "2", an error of about plus or minus 3% occurs.

FIG. 11-1 (B) shows an example in which the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), unlike the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), the execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit is "60/100" when the set value is "1". When the set value is "2", it is "50/100", and when the set value is "3", it is "40/100". Further, the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "3/299" when the set value is "1", "2.5 / 249" when the set value is "2", and "2" when the set value is "3". / 199 ".

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in total variation becomes "6/500" regardless of the set value. Further, the reliability D of the notice X is "1/6" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended ratio, and the advance notice effect can be preferably executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the advance notice effect.

In this embodiment, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value as the notice effect, but a comparison like the notice X among a plurality of types of notice effects is made. Such adjustments are made for highly reliable notice effects and special notice effects (that is, some notice effects) that are the highlights, and for other notice effects, the execution ratio is not adjusted, depending on the set value. The appearance rate and reliability may be changed. That is, other notice effects may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. By doing so, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are adjusted for all the notice effects, the burden of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability is generated, and the processing burden of determining whether or not the notice effects are executed is generated. Can be prevented from increasing.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is different, but even if they are the same as shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), the notice X is different. The rate B that is executed and becomes a loss is "1/100", which is substantially the same for all the set values, and the appearance rate C of the notice X is also substantially the same (about 1.17% to 1.25%). , The execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

In this case, by adjusting only the execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit, the appearance rate C and the reliability D of the notice X can be set to the same or substantially the same range. In this way, by making the execution rate of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of the total variation, common, it is not necessary to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution rate different. The control burden for executing is reduced.

FIG. 11-1 (C) shows an example when the appearance rates of the notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (C), unlike the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "2.5 / 299" when the set value is "1". , "2/249" when the set value is "2", and "1.5 / 199" when the set value is "3". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in total variation becomes "1/100" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or suggesting the set value unnecessarily depending on the execution frequency of the advance notice effect. Further, the occupancy rate of the notice X in the case of a big hit can be made common, and a suitable appearance rate in the case of a big hit can be maintained.

In this case, the appearance rate C of the notice X is common regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. 11-1 (C), the reliability of the notice X changes according to the set value. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. Further, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the reliability can be estimated and the set value can also be estimated, so that the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be expected to improve. By matching the appearance rates, the reliability according to the set value may change relatively large (about plus or minus 10%) such as 30% to 50%. This makes it easier to guess the set value.

FIG. 11-1 (D) shows an example when the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (D), unlike the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "2.5 / 299" when the set value is "1". , "2.5 / 249" when the set value is "2", and "2.5 / 199" when the set value is "3". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the reliability D of the notice X becomes "1/6" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the same reliability can be notified by the notice X regardless of the set value. Further, the occupancy rate of the notice X in the case of a big hit can be made common, and a suitable appearance rate in the case of a big hit can be maintained.

In this case, the reliability D of the notice X is common regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. 11-1 (D), the appearance rate of the notice X changes according to the set value. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. Further, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the set value can be estimated, so that the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be expected to improve.

In addition, in FIG. 11-1 (D), the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same regardless of the set value by making the execution rate of the notice X at the time of loss different according to the set value. However, by assuming that the execution rate of the notice X at the time of loss is the same regardless of the set value and the execution rate of the notice X at the time of a big hit is different according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X is the same regardless of the set value. It may be adjusted so as to be. In this way, by making the execution rate of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of the total variation, common, it is not necessary to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution rate different. The control burden for executing is reduced.

The jackpot probabilities a shown in FIGS. 11-1 (A) to 11-1 (D) and the adjustment examples of the advance notice execution ratios b and d are examples. In order to make at least one of the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value, the appearance rate C and the reliability D should be the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. In addition, at least one of the advance notice execution ratios b and d may be changed according to the set value. That is, when the appearance rate C is the same (substantially the same), the execution rate of the notice is such that the appearance rate C = a × b + (1-a) × d is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. At least one of b and d may be adjusted. When the reliability D of the advance notice effect is the same (substantially the same), the reliability D of the advance notice effect D = (a × b) / (a × b + (1-a) × d) regardless of the set value. At least one of the advance notice execution ratios b and d may be adjusted so that they are the same (substantially the same).

In the execution ratio shown in FIG. 11-1, the execution ratio according to the jackpot type was not considered, but when there are a plurality of jackpot types, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect (notice X) is set according to the jackpot type. It may be different. For example, the jackpot probability a is the same as that shown in FIG. 11-1, and there are normal jackpots and probabilistic jackpots as jackpot types, and when the jackpot is equal to any of the jackpot types (50%). explain.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), the normal jackpot probability a1 and the probability variation jackpot probability a2 are each half of the jackpot probability a in FIG. 11-1. Then, in this example, the execution ratio b1 of the notice X at the time of a normal big hit is "60/100" when the set value is "1", "50/100" when the set value is "2", and the set value "3". In the case, it is "40/100". Therefore, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A1 (= normal jackpot probability a1 x execution ratio b1) at which the notice X is executed and becomes a normal jackpot is "1/1000" regardless of the set value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), the execution ratio b2 of the notice X at the time of the probability variation big hit is 50/100 (unadjusted) regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A2 (= probability variation jackpot probability a2 x execution ratio b2) when the notice X is executed and becomes a probability variation jackpot is "1/1200" when the set value is "1", and the set value " In the case of "2", it is "1/1000", and in the case of the set value "3", it is "1/800". Then, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A (= A1 + A2) in which the notice X is executed and becomes a big hit is "44/24000" when the set value is "1" and "48/24000" when the set value is "2". , In the case of the set value "3", it is "54/24000".

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is “196 / (299 × 80)” when the set value is “1” and “2” when the set value is “2”. 192 / (249 × 96) ”, and in the case of the set value“ 3 ”, it is“ 186 / (199 × 120) ”. Therefore, the rate at which the notice X is executed and the result is lost (ratio to the total variation) is "196/24000" when the set value is "1", "192/24000" when the set value is "2", and the set value " In the case of "3", it is "186/24000".

As a result of the above, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), the appearance rate C (= A + B) of the notice X in total variation is "1/100" regardless of the set value. In this way, when there are multiple jackpot types, by making the execution rate of the notice effect different for each jackpot type, the appearance rate of the notice effect can be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. It may be. By doing so, when the advance notice effect is executed while the execution rate of the advance notice effect is within the same or substantially the same range, the ratio of which jackpot type is used differs depending on the set value. It is expected that a specific jackpot (for example, a probabilistic jackpot) will be obtained by executing the advance notice effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2, the appearance rate of the notice X was adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by making the execution rate of the notice X at the time of a normal big hit different, but other big hit types and loss. The appearance rate C of the notice X may be adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by making the execution rate of the time different. That is, d may be adjusted with at least one of the advance notice execution rates b1 and b2 so that the appearance rate C = a1 × b1 + a2 × b2 + c × d of the notice X is the same (substantially the same).

Further, the reliability D of the notice X may be the same (substantially the same) by making the execution rate of the notice X different according to the jackpot type. In this case, the reliability D = (a1 × b1 + a2 × b2) / (a1 × b1 + a2 × b2 + ((1-a1-a2) × d)) of the advance notice effect is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. As described above, at least one of the advance notice execution ratios b1 and b2 and d may be adjusted. By doing so, the advance notice effect is executed while keeping the reliability of the advance notice effect within the same or substantially the same range. In this case, since the ratio of which jackpot type is selected differs depending on the set value, it is expected that a specific jackpot (for example, a probabilistic jackpot) will be obtained by executing the advance notice effect according to the set value.

Further, for some of the advance notice effects, the execution rate of the specific jackpot type may be executed at the same execution rate regardless of the set value. For example, there are two types of jackpots, a normal jackpot and a probabilistic jackpot (50% of the distribution of the jackpot type), and as a preview effect, a notice Y for notifying that the jackpot will be a probabilistic jackpot may be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-3, in the case of a normal big hit or loss, the execution ratio of the notice Y is 0/100 (0%) regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the execution rate b2 of the notice Y at the time of the probability variation big hit is "60/100" when the set value is "1", "50/100" when the set value is "2", and "40 / 100" when the set value is "3". It is "100". The jackpot probability is the same as the example shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, the appearance rate of the total variation notice Y is "1/1000" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice Y notifying that the probability variation jackpot will occur at the time of the probability variation jackpot at the same appearance rate regardless of the set value. In addition, it can be announced that it will be a probable change jackpot regardless of the set value. Further, in the case of a normal big hit, the notice Y is not executed regardless of the set value, so that the processing load can be reduced. Although not shown, the reliability is 100% because the notice Y is executed only at the time of the probability change big hit.

A notice effect for notifying that it will be a probable big hit may be executed at the time of loss. For example, as a notice effect, when the notice Z for notifying that the probability variation big hit will be executed is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-4, in the case of the normal big hit, the execution rate of the notice Z is 0 regardless of the set value. It becomes / 100 (0%). On the other hand, the execution rate b2 of the notice Z at the time of the probabilistic big hit is the same as the execution rate of the notice Y shown in FIG. 11-3, and the rate at which the notice Z is executed and becomes a big hit is "1" regardless of the set value. It is "/ 1000". The execution ratio d of the notice Z at the time of loss is "3/2990" when the set value is "1", "2.5 / 2490" when the set value is "2", and "2" when the set value is "3". / 1990 ". The ratio B at which the notice Y is executed and the result is lost is "1/1000" in any of the set values.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice Z in total variation becomes "2/1000" regardless of the set value. Further, the reliability D of the notice Z is "1/2" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the notice Z from changing according to the set value and becoming an unintended ratio, and if a big hit occurs, a notice that the probability change big hit will be announced. Z can be preferably performed. Further, in the case of a normal big hit, the notice Z is not executed regardless of the set value, so that the processing load can be reduced. It should be noted that either the appearance rate of the notice Z or the reliability may differ depending on the set value.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect in 53AK will be described. The lower arrow in FIG. 11-5 (A) indicates that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" of the image display device 5. It shows that there is. When it is decided to execute the notice X as the notice effect, the character image 53AK001 as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B) has a line of "chance" during the execution of each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Notice X is executed. This allows the player to recognize that there is a high possibility that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state. In particular, when the reliability is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, the player can recognize that there is a high possibility that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state without being aware of the set value. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R stop, and reach is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (D), the characters "Super Reach!" Are displayed, and for example, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (E), the reach effect of the super reach in which the characters confront each other is displayed. To be started. During the reach effect of the super reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (E), the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5.

Then, for example, immediately before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (F), the notice Y or the notice Z in which the character image 53AK002 issues the line "probability change !?" is executed. To. As a result, the player expects to be a probabilistic jackpot. In particular, if it is a notice Y, it will be confirmed that it will be a probable change jackpot, so that the interest will be improved.

In addition, when both the notice Y and the notice Z can be executed, it is a production that gives a notice and suggests that both of them will be a probable change jackpot, but the display color and the lines of the lines are so that the player can distinguish them. It is preferable to make some production modes such as contents different.

After that, when the display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (G), it is displayed that the ally character has won, and as shown in FIG. 11-5 (H), with the big hit combination. The decorative pattern is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the effect mode of the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 11-5 is an example, and any effect mode may be used as long as it can suggest and give notice of a big hit or a probability variation big hit.

(Modification example of feature part 53AK)
The feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, three stages of 1 to 3 are provided as the set value, but the set value may be 2 stages or less or 4 stages or more (for example, 6 stages). Further, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the jackpot probability is for the player, but the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the jackpot probability is for the player. Further, the jackpot probability according to the set value shown in FIG. 11-1 and the like is also an example, and it is sufficient that the jackpot probability is stepwise according to the set value.

In the above embodiment, the execution rate of the advance notice effect is set to the set value so that at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect of all the set values (set values 1 to 3) is within the same or substantially the same range. It was changed (adjusted) according to it, but of the multiple types of setting values, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of some setting values should be within the same or substantially the same range. You may. For example, even if at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of the first set value (for example, set value 1) and the second set value (for example, set value 2) is within the same or substantially the same range. Good. Further, when the set value is in 6 stages, at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect of the first set value group (for example, set values 1 to 3) is set to be the same or substantially the same range. , At least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of the second set value group (for example, set values 4 to 6) may be the same or substantially the same range.

In the above embodiment, as the specific effect, the appearance rate and reliability of at least a part of the notice effects are set to be the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, but the specific effect is controlled to an advantageous state. It may be another production that suggests that. For example, when the type of reach effect and the number of pseudo-reams are determined on the side of the effect control board 12, the type of reach effect and the determination ratio of the number of pseudo-reams are different depending on the set value. The appearance rate and reliability of each reach effect, and the appearance rate and reliability of each pseudo-ream number may be controlled to be the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value.

Further, when determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, a table to which different execution ratios are assigned to each set value may be used to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, or to determine the advance notice effect. A reference table may be provided, a table corresponding to the set value may be calculated in the table, and a table corresponding to the set value may be generated, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed may be determined using the generated table.

The execution rate, appearance rate, and reliability of the advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4 are examples, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Further, as the notice effect, a notice effect other than the notice effect shown in the above embodiment may be feasible. In such other notice effects, the appearance rate and reliability may be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set value, and some or all of the other notice effects may be set to the set value. Regardless, the appearance rate and reliability may be changed according to the set value as the same execution rate. For example, among the notice effects, for the notice effects with relatively high reliability, the appearance rate and reliability are set to be the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, and the reliability is relatively low or the appearance rate is low. For high notice effects, the same execution rate may be used regardless of the set value. By doing so, the control burden regarding the determination of whether or not to execute the advance notice effect is reduced as compared with the case where the appearance rate and the reliability are the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value for all the advance notice effects. Can be mitigated.

In addition, for a specific advance notice effect among a plurality of types of advance notice effects, it is executed even if some setting values are lost, and if it is another set value, it is not executed (or is executed) if it is lost. It may be difficult). For example, a specific advance notice effect with high reliability (for example, jackpot probability of 90% or more) is not executed at the time of loss in the case of a low setting value (for example, 1 to 3 in the case of 6 stages), and a high setting value (for example, In the case of 4 to 6) in the case of 6 steps, it may be possible to execute at the time of loss. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect by losing even though the specific advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to suggest and notify that the set value is high.

In the figures shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, the execution ratio of the notice X is shown as the notice effect, but after deciding whether or not to execute the notice effect according to the display result, the type of the notice effect (effect pattern). ) May be determined. In this case, when determining the type of advance notice effect, the execution ratio of each advance notice effect is set to the set value so that the appearance rate and reliability of each advance notice effect are within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. It may be different depending on it.

In the above embodiment, whether or not the advance notice is executed is determined regardless of the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, but at the time of loss, depending on the fluctuation pattern (presence / absence and type of reach, presence / absence and number of pseudo-reams), The execution ratio of the advance notice effect may be different.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state is not considered, but even in the probabilistic state, the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. Further, depending on the game state, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. For example, in a probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability of a big hit is high and the advance notice effect is easily executed, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. Such adjustment may not be performed in the normal state (low probability state). Further, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect (specific advance notice effect) may be different between different gaming states, or may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range. For example, if it is difficult to distinguish between the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state due to the common background, etc. ) May be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range. Further, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game state in which the appearance is indistinguishable from being recognized depending on the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect.

In the above embodiment, when there are a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot as the jackpot type, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value according to the jackpot type. It was. The difference in the jackpot type may be the difference in the number of rounds of the jackpot, or the difference in the length of the time saving state or the probability variation state controlled by the jackpot gaming state.

When a small hit is provided as a display result and a notice effect is executed even when a small hit occurs, the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of a big hit or a loss is made different according to the set value as in the above embodiment. In addition, by making the execution rate of the advance notice effect at the time of a small hit different according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. .. For example, in a gaming machine in which a specific area is provided in the winning opening opened in the small hit game state and the game machine is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through the specific area in the small hit game state, it is announced that the small hit will be obtained. Since it can be said that the advance notice effect is a big hit, the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect for notifying the small hit may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. In this case, when the small hit probability is changed according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect are changed by changing the execution rate of the notice effect in consideration of the small hit probability according to the set value. You can adjust the degree. Specifically, by considering the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability according to the set value, the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss is made different according to the set value. The appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value.

If the advance notice effect can be executed for each of the multiple variations of the pseudo-ream, the appearance rate and reliability are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value only for the advance notice effect in the final change of the pseudo-ream. You may. By doing so, it is possible to easily design the advance notice effect and reduce the processing load as compared with the case of adjusting the appearance rate and the reliability for all the fluctuations of the pseudo-ream.

In the above embodiment, only the jackpot probability changes depending on the set value, but the effect mode and the effect execution ratio may be different depending on the set value on the effect control board 12. For example, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, different reach effects, pseudo-reams, and other effects during variable display may be executed based on the set values. By doing so, it is possible to suggest a set value for the effect mode by the execution rate of the effect.

A part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example according to the feature portion 53AK may be appropriately combined.

(Explanation of means related to feature 53AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 53AK is
It can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3 or set values 1 to 6, etc.), and is in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player at a different ratio depending on the set set value. A gaming machine that can be controlled to the gaming state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 53AK).
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is provided.
The specific effect executing means has an appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is the first set value and an appearance of the specific effect when the set value is a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the rate and the rate are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 11-1 (B) and 11-3, FIGS. 11-2 to 11-3).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed at a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The specific effect executing means makes the execution ratio of the specific effect different when it is not controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 11-1 (B), (C), 11-2, 11). -4) You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect can be suitably adjusted while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled in an advantageous state.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The specific effect executing means makes the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state different according to the set value (for example, FIGS. 11-1 (B), 11-2 to 11-4). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect can be preferably adjusted.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
The ratio (for example, reliability) controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed is within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 11-1 (B), 11). -3, Fig. 11-4).
According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set value, and the control is performed in an advantageous state, so that the interest is improved.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed may be changed depending on the set value (for example, FIGS. 11-1 (C) and 11-2).
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect is adjusted, but the reliability is changed, so that it is possible to provide a game playability in which the reliability is estimated, and the interest is improved.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may make the execution ratio of the specific effect different depending on the set value for each type of the controlled advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained according to the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves the interest.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained regardless of the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 54AK)
Further, the feature portion 53AK includes an invention relating to the feature portion 54AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 54AK is
It can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3 or set values 1 to 6, etc.), and is in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player at a different ratio depending on the set set value. A gaming machine that can be controlled to the gaming state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 54AK).
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is provided.
The specific effect executing means has a rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed when the set value is the first set value, and a second setting value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed at the set value is within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIG. 11-1 (Fig. 11-1). B), (D), FIG. 11-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed with a common reliability (ratio controlled to an advantageous state) regardless of the set value, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The specific effect executing means makes the execution ratio of the specific effect different when it is not controlled to the advantageous state according to the set value (for example, FIGS. 11-1 (B), (D), 11-4). You may.
According to such a configuration, the reliability of the specific effect can be suitably adjusted while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled in an advantageous state.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The specific effect executing means may have different execution ratios of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 11-1 (B) and 11-4). ..
According to such a configuration, the reliability of the specific effect can be suitably adjusted.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 11-1 (B), 11-3, 11-4).
According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set value, and the control is performed in an advantageous state, so that the interest is improved.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be changed depending on the set value (for example, FIG. 11-1 (D)).
According to such a configuration, the reliability of the specific effect is adjusted, but the appearance rate changes, so that the interest is improved.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may make the execution ratio of the specific effect different depending on the set value for each type of the controlled advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained according to the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves the interest.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained regardless of the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved.

(Explanation of feature 57AK)
Subsequently, the feature 57AK will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 57AK can display a hold display corresponding to the held variable display before execution and an active display corresponding to the variable display during execution as specific displays corresponding to the variable display. In addition, it is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect (hold change notice) that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display.

In addition, it is possible to execute a zone effect that shifts to the effect zone, which indicates that the effect state is different from the normal effect state (when the power is turned on, etc.) and is advantageous for the player. During the zone effect, the image display device 5 is displayed to indicate that the zone has been moved to the zone on the effect. The zone effect can be executed over a plurality of variable displays, and can notify that the player is in an advantageous state over the plurality of variable displays. Such a zone effect is also executed as a look-ahead advance notice effect indicating that it is advantageous (high hit reliability, etc.) based on the variable display before execution.

In this embodiment, a display change high probability zone indicating that the display mode of the specific display is likely to change is provided as a zone for the effect. The zone effect of the display change high probability zone is also called a specific effect. In the case of the display change high probability zone (during execution of the specific effect), the pending change notice is executed and the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the case of not in the display change high probability zone. As a result, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the player can expect that the display mode of the specific display changes, that is, a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 57AK, by shifting from the display change high probability zone to the normal effect state, the display mode changes in the display change high probability zone even after the display change high probability zone (execution of the specific effect) is completed. The display mode of the specific display is more likely to change due to the execution of the pending change notice than the specific display in which the display mode does not change in the display change high probability zone. As a result, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will change further even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the player's expectations can be suppressed while suppressing the player's disappointment due to the end of the display change high probability zone. The feeling can be maintained and the interest of the game is improved.

In the feature unit 57AK, in addition to the display change high probability zone as a production zone, a chance zone indicating that the probability of becoming a big hit is high is provided. The zone production of the chance zone is also called a special production. As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of zones are provided, and it is possible to shift to any zone as a zone effect. The details of the chance zone will be described later.

FIG. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of the production operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature portion 57AK. In FIG. 12-1 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 "left", "middle", and "right" by the downward arrow. It shows that there is. The image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 57AK001 for displaying the active display and a hold display area 57AK002 for displaying the hold display. In the hold display area 57AK002, up to four hold displays can be displayed corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and the right side corresponds to the old hold information and the left side corresponds to the new hold information. When the variable display ends and the next variable display is executed, the active display is erased and all specific displays (hold display and active display) are shifted to the right.

In FIG. 12-1 (A), two hold displays are displayed. Here, the active display and the hold display are all displayed as white circles, which is a normal mode. In addition, the zone effect has not been executed, and the effect is normal.

Here, when the game ball enters the winning ball device 6A, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), the hold display is increased by one to a total of three. Further, since it is decided to shift to the display change high probability zone here, the zone display 57AK003 indicating that the display change high probability zone is displayed is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5, and is controlled by the display change high probability zone. To.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (C), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss stops and the hold display (specific display) shifts, the image of the star with respect to the second hold display. An effect (change suggestion effect) in which 57AK004 moves and acts (collisions) is executed. In the display change high probability zone, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold display (specific display) of the action target changes (the hold change notice is executed) by such a change suggestion effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (D), the display mode of the hold display, which is the target of the change suggestion effect, changes to, for example, blue.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (E), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and the hold display (specific display) shifts, the change suggestion effect is applied to the first hold display. Will be executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), the display mode of the hold display, which is the target of the change suggestion effect, changes to, for example, green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (G), the change suggestion effect is executed for the active display at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and the first hold display shifts to the active display. To. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (H), the display mode of the active display, which is the target of the change suggestion effect, changes to, for example, purple.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (I), the change suggestion effect is executed for the active display at the timing when the reach is established in the variable display corresponding to the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (J), the display mode of the active display, which is the target of the change suggestion effect, changes to, for example, red. At this time, the zone display 57AK003 is erased, and the control to the display change high probability zone ends. As described above, in this embodiment, the display change high probability zone ends in the middle of the variable display of the target (variable display corresponding to the start winning prize that triggered the execution of the zone effect).

After that, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (K), at the timing of developing to super reach, the display mode of the active display changes to, for example, gold without executing the change suggestion effect.

In this way, when the zone shifts to the display change high probability zone, the display mode of the specific display is likely to change. Therefore, by shifting to the display change high probability zone, the player can expect that the display mode of the specific display will change or become a big hit. Further, even after the display change high probability zone ends, the change timing of the specific display (Fig. 12-1 (K)) is provided, and the display mode has changed before the end of the display change high probability zone. Is more likely to change the display mode even after the end of the display change high probability zone than the specific display in which the display mode has not changed. As a result, the player's disappointment due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Display change Even if it is not in the high probability zone, the hold display notice may be executed and the display mode of the specific display may change. However, the specific display whose display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone is more likely to change in the display mode than the specific display in which the display mode has changed when the display change high probability zone is not provided. That is, the number of times the specific display changes is likely to increase during the display change high probability zone. As a result, during the display change high probability zone, many successful experiences such as a change in the display mode of the specific display can be enjoyed, so that the interest in the display change high probability zone can be improved. It should be noted that the specific display whose display mode has changed in the case of the display change high probability zone is more than the specific display in which the display mode has changed even after the display change high probability zone ends. The display mode is easy to change. As a result, the player's disappointment due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the specific display is the time when the specific display is shifted and the predetermined timing during the active display. Further, in this embodiment, a change suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes is executed. In particular, during the display change high probability zone, it is always executed at all timings where the specific display can change. In addition, in FIG. 12-1, after the change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display always changes (change succeeds), but it may not change (change fails). .. That is, there are cases where the change suggestion effect is not good. By doing so, it is possible to effectively incite the change in the display mode of the specific display in the display change high probability zone, and the effect of the effect is improved.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the change suggestion effect is not executed unless the display change high probability zone is executed. Even when the display change is not in the high probability zone, the change suggestion effect may be executed. In this case, the execution rate of the change suggestion effect when the zone is not the display change high probability zone may be lower than that when the display change high probability zone is set. For example, by setting the execution rate of the change suggestion effect of Gase when it is not in the display change high probability zone to be lower than that in the case of the display change high probability zone (for example, the change suggestion effect of Gase is not executed), the relative time ratio. May be lowered.

It should be noted that the rate at which the display mode of the specific display changes (success rate) after the change suggestion effect is executed may be different depending on whether the display change high probability zone is not present or not. For example, the success rate may be higher or lower in cases other than the display change high probability zone than in other cases. In addition, a plurality of effect modes of the change suggestion effect may be provided so that the success rate and the rate of the effect mode (number of stages) that change thereafter may differ depending on the effect mode of the change suggestion effect. By doing so, the change suggestion effect becomes various, and the change suggestion effect can effectively arouse the expectation of the player.

Further, when the display change is not in the high probability zone, the execution mode of the change suggestion effect may be different. When it is not the display change high probability zone, the change suggestion effect of a different effect mode may be executed as in the case of the display change high probability zone. By doing so, the effect can be diversified and the effect can be improved.

Regardless of which zone the zone is, the execution rate of the change suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode when the specific display is actually changed may be different. By doing so, in the display change high probability zone, the execution rate of the change suggestion effect is high, and the change suggestion effect of the mode in which the display mode of the specific display changes is high is easy to be executed. In addition, the success rate can be different depending on the presence or absence of the change suggestion effect and the effect mode.

FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing the operation of the specific display process for displaying the specific display of the feature unit 57AK and executing the pending change notice. The specific display process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in, for example, the lookahead advance notice setting process in step S161 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. If the effect operation according to the present invention can be realized, the position (execution timing) of the corresponding display process is not limited to the lookahead advance notice setting process.

In the specific display process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning prize has been generated due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (step 57AKS001). In the process of step 57AKS001, it may be determined whether or not the start-up prize has occurred, for example, by determining whether or not the effect control command for designating the occurrence of the start-up prize has been received from the main board 11.

When it is determined that a start-up prize has occurred (step 57AKS001; Yes), the final display mode (final display mode) of the specific display corresponding to the start-up prize and the process of changing the display mode of the specific display (pending change notice) The display change pattern corresponding to the effect mode) is determined (step 57AKS002).

In the process of step 57AKS002, the display result and the variation category (rough classification of the variation pattern, etc.) are pre-read based on the effect control command for specifying the determination result of the look-ahead determination received at the start winning, and the final display mode and display are displayed. The change pattern is determined. In the process of step 57AKS002, the final display mode and the display change pattern are determined to determine whether or not the pending change notice is executed and the effect mode thereof. In this embodiment, a pending change notice in which the display mode changes a plurality of times may be executed between the time when the specific display is displayed and the time when the variable display corresponding to the specific display ends, but the final display mode After determining, the display change pattern (change process) corresponding to the final display mode is determined.

In step 57AKS002, first, the final display mode is determined according to the display result at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-3, for example. In this embodiment, as a display mode (display color) of the specific display, as shown in FIG. 12-3, “white” which is a normal mode before the execution of the change effect and a notice mode which changes due to the pending change notice are used. Display modes of "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are provided. Then, as shown in the determination ratio of FIG. 12-3, the display result (variable category) is different depending on which of "non-reach", "normal loss", "super reach loss", and "big hit". The final display mode is determined. In the decision ratio shown in Fig. 12-3, there is a possibility that the final display mode will be a big hit in the order of ("white" <) "blue" <"green" <"purple" <"red" <"gold" <"rainbow". There is a high possibility that (big hit reliability), super reach (super reach reliability), and reach will be established.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-3, the display modes of "white", "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are set to "rainbow", respectively. It is also referred to as "a", "b", "c", "d", "e", "f], and" g ". In this embodiment, a plurality of display modes of the specific display are provided depending on the difference in color, but a plurality of display modes of the specific display may be provided depending on the difference in shape, pattern, motif, and character. That is, the difference between "a" and "g" may be a difference in shape, pattern, motif, or character.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, when the display mode of the specific display remains "white" (when the final display mode is "white"), there is no big hit, and the big hit reliability is 0%. ing. When the display mode becomes "blue", there is a high possibility that reach will be established. When the display mode is "green", at least reach is established. Further, when the display mode is "purple", it is determined that the display mode is "super reach". However, when the final display mode is "blue" to "purple", the jackpot reliability is low.

When the display mode of the specific display is "red", the jackpot reliability is significantly higher (12 times or more) than in the case of "purple" or less. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the display mode is "red" or higher. When the display mode is "gold", the jackpot reliability is higher (60%), and when the display mode is "rainbow", it is confirmed that the jackpot is a big hit. In addition, since the display mode of "rainbow" is determined only at 7% at the time of big hit (generally 1/300 etc. in the normal state), its appearance rate is low and it is a rare production (premier production). It has become.

As described above, in this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display is subdivided, and eight stages of display modes are provided. Therefore, when the display change high probability zone is reached, the display mode can be designed to be easily changed (the number of changes is large), and the number of times the display can be changed can be increased. Further, in this embodiment, as the change timing (timing that can change) of the display mode of the specific display, as shown in FIGS. , "Ho 2", "Ho 1", "A 1", "A 2", "A 3" are provided. "Ho 4" is when it is displayed as the fourth hold display. "Holding 3" is when it is displayed as the third hold display (at the time of winning or shifting). "Holding 2" is when it is displayed as the second hold display (at the time of winning or shifting). "Holding 1" is when it is displayed as the first hold display (at the time of winning or shifting). "A1" is when it is displayed as an active display (at the time of winning or shifting). "A2" is when it is displayed as an active display, and changes such as the timing of the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol (when the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped due to the establishment of reach, and when all the symbols are temporarily stopped during the pseudo-continuous time). The timing of the first big hit in the middle, etc.). “A3” is when it is displayed as an active display, and when it develops into super reach (when the reach production of super reach starts, etc.).

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of change stages and change timings of the specific display are provided. As a result, the frequency with which the display mode of the specific display changes can be increased, and the interest of the pending change notice can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), the control to the display change high probability zone is executed at any timing from "maintenance 4" to "a1" and ends at the timing of "a2". To do. Therefore, "A3" is always outside the display change high probability zone. Since "A3" is used when developing into super reach, etc., by ending the display change high probability zone before developing into super reach, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated, and pay attention to the reach production of super reach. Can be made to. In addition, two or more change timings may be provided outside the display change high probability zone.

In the process of step 57AKS002, after the final display mode is determined, the display change pattern is determined according to the determined final display mode. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of display change patterns corresponding to the scenario of the change of the display mode of the specific display at each change timing are provided, and a plurality of display change patterns corresponding to the final change to the final display mode are provided. It is designed to select and decide from the types.

FIG. 12-5 is a diagram showing a part of the display change pattern of the feature portion 57AK. FIG. 12-5 (A) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is b (blue). As shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), in this embodiment, four types of display change patterns pt2-1, pt2-2, pt2-3, as display change patterns when the final display mode is b (blue). pt2-4 is provided. In FIG. 12-5, the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is shown. For example, the display change pattern pt2-1 is displayed in a (white) from "maintenance 4" to "a1", and indicates that it changes from a (white) to b (blue) in "a2". Further, the display change pattern pt2-4 indicates that "main 4" to "a3" are displayed in b (blue).

When determining the display change pattern, one of the display change patterns is determined regardless of the current number of pending memories (that is, the number of pending display or active display at the time of winning). There is. Therefore, when the display change pattern is determined to be past the change timing when the display mode changes (when the number of reserved memories is less than the change timing when the display mode changes), the specific display is displayed in the changed display mode. Is displayed. In addition, FIG. 12-5 also shows the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display, and the number of changes when the final display mode is b (blue) depends on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern. It will be 0 times or 1 time. For example, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less and the display change pattern pt2-3 is determined, it is displayed in b "blue" from beginning to end, and the number of changes is 0.

FIG. 12-5 (B) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is c (green). As shown in FIG. 12-5 (B), in this embodiment, seven types of display change patterns pt3-1 to pt3-7 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is c (green). .. As shown in FIG. 12-5 (B), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is defined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is c (green), the number of changes is 0 to 2 times depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 12-5 (C) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is e (red). As shown in FIG. 12-5 (C), in this embodiment, 13 types of display change patterns pt5-1 to pt5-13 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is e (red). .. As shown in FIG. 12-5 (C), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is defined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is e (red), the number of changes is 0 to 4 times depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 12-5 (D) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is g (rainbow). As shown in FIG. 12-5 (D), in this embodiment, 10 types of display change patterns pt7-1 to pt7-10 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is g (rainbow). .. As shown in FIG. 12-5 (D), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is defined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is g (rainbow), the number of changes is 1 to 6 times depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

In FIG. 12-5, the display change pattern when the final display mode is b, c, e, g is shown, but a plurality of display change patterns when the final display mode is other are also provided. In the process of step 57AKS002, one of the display change patterns as shown in FIG. 12-5 is determined according to the final display mode. The determination ratio of the display change pattern may be arbitrary, but it may be an equal ratio, or it may be determined at a different ratio depending on the display result. When deciding at different ratios according to the display result, it becomes possible to predict the possibility of a big hit depending on the change timing.

The display change pattern shown in FIG. 12-5 is an example, and a display change pattern other than that shown in FIG. 12-5 may be provided, or the display change pattern shown in FIG. 12-5 may be provided. There may be few types.

In the process of step 57AKS002, after the final display mode of the specific display and the display change pattern corresponding to the change process of the display mode of the specific display are determined, whether or not the zone effect is executed and the type of zone when the zone effect is executed are determined. (Step 57AKS003). As described above, in this embodiment, the effect of controlling the display change high probability zone is executed as the zone effect. In addition, as a zone different from the display change high probability zone, an effect of controlling the chance zone indicating that there is a high possibility of a big hit is also executed. In this embodiment, a normal effect state in which the zone effect is not executed, a display change high probability zone, and a chance zone are provided, and are controlled to any of the zones when the zone effect is executed.

In step 57AKS003, first, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning prize that has occurred this time. FIG. 12-6 (A) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone. As shown in FIG. 12-6 (A), when the number of changes is 5 or 6, the display change is always shifted to the high probability zone, and when the number of changes is 0 or 1, the display changes. It is designed not to move to the high probability zone. Further, when the number of changes is 2 to 4, the larger the number of changes, the higher the ratio of shifting to the display change high probability zone. By doing so, by controlling the display change high probability zone, the rate at which the specific display changes increases, so that the player's expectation can be improved.

The control to the display change high probability zone ends during the variable display (after the change timing "A2") of the pending change notice, but the number of changes does not matter at which timing the display mode changes. The higher the number, the higher the rate of transition to the display change high probability zone, so it is easy to change the specific display that triggered the zone transition during the display change high probability zone, and of course, control to the display change high probability zone. Even after the end of, the rate of change of the specific display (active display) that triggered the zone transition is high. Therefore, even after the control to the display change high probability zone is completed, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be prevented.

It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to whether or not the active display changes at the change timing “A3” outside the display change high probability zone. For example, as the number of changes increases, the rate of shifting to the display change high probability zone is increased, and when the active display changes in "A3", the rate of shifting to the display change high probability zone is further increased. May be good. By doing so, when the display change high probability zone is controlled, the rate of change even after the display change high probability zone ends is high, so that the player's expectation after the display change high probability zone ends. You will be able to maintain the feeling more.

If it is determined in step 57AKS003 to control to the display change high probability zone, the process proceeds to step 57AKS004 without deciding whether to control to the chance zone. That is, in this embodiment, the control to the display change high probability zone is prioritized as the zone effect, and when it is determined whether or not the display change high probability zone is controlled and the display change high probability zone is controlled, the chance zone is set to. It is not controlled. The priority of zone production may be reversed. That is, after determining whether or not to control the chance zone, it may be determined whether or not to control the display change high probability zone when it is determined not to control the chance zone.

If it is decided not to control the display change high probability zone, it is decided whether or not to control the chance zone. In this case, it is determined whether or not to shift to the chance zone according to the final display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning prize generated this time. FIG. 12-6 (B) shows the decision ratio of whether or not to shift to the chance zone. As shown in FIG. 12-6 (B), when the final display mode is g (rainbow), it is always moved to the chance zone, and when the final display mode is f (gold), the probability is high ( It shifts to the chance zone at 80%), and does not shift to the chance zone when the final display mode is other than those. By doing so, by being controlled by the chance zone, the specific display is likely to change to a mode with high jackpot reliability, so that the player's expectation can be improved.

The display change high probability zone also has a higher jackpot reliability than in the normal production state, but the chance zone has a higher jackpot reliability than the display change high probability zone (finally, the jackpot reliability). The display mode changes to a high degree). In this way, by providing multiple zones such as a display change high probability zone where the display mode of the specific display is easy to change and a successful experience can be enjoyed, and a chance zone where the jackpot reliability is extremely high, the variation of zone production becomes diverse. The effect of the production is improved, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that although the jackpot reliability is higher than in the case where the chance zone is in the normal production state, the jackpot reliability may be lower than in the display change high probability zone.

Subsequently, the determination results in steps 57AKS002 and 57AKS003 are saved (step 57AKS004), and the control of displaying the specific display in the display mode according to the determination result and the control of shifting to the zone according to the determination result are executed (step 57AKS004). Step 57AKS005). If the control to move to the zone is executed here, the current zone may be set to the value corresponding to the identifiable zone flag. Further, the control for notifying the shift to the zone may be executed by displaying the image corresponding to the zone to be shifted on the image display device 5 or the like.

When it is determined that the start winning has not occurred (step 57AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not it is the shift timing of the hold display (step 57AKS006). Since the hold display shifts when a new variable display is started, in step 57AKS006, for example, depending on whether or not an effect control command for specifying the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11, the hold display shift timing is used. It may be determined whether or not there is.

When it is determined that it is the shift timing of the hold display (step 57AKS006; Yes), the control to delete the hold display of the shift source (step 57AKS007) and the control to display the specific display of the shift destination (hold display or active display) Execute (step 57AKS008). At this time, for example, when the display mode changes at the shift destination with reference to the display change pattern, control for changing the specific display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern is also executed. .. Further, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the control for executing the change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 12-1 is also executed. After that, the specific display process is terminated.

After executing the process of step 57AKS005, or when it is determined that it is not the shift timing of the hold display (step 57AKS006; No), it is determined whether or not it is the change timing of the active display (step 57AKS009). In step 57AKS009, for example, it is determined from the current fluctuation pattern, the value of the timer for measuring the fluctuation time, and the like whether or not the change timing of "A2" and "A3" has come, and the display change pattern is referred to. Then, it may be determined whether or not the display mode of the active display is changed at the reached change timing.

When it is determined that it is the change timing of the active display (step 57AKS009; Yes), control is performed to change the display mode of the active display (step 57AKS010). In step 57AKS010, control for changing the active display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern is executed with reference to, for example, the display change pattern. Further, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the control for executing the change suggestion effect is also executed.

When it is determined that it is not the change timing of the active display (step 57AKS009; No), or after the processing of step 57AKS010 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the zone effect (step 57AKS011). Here, for example, it is determined from the zone flag whether or not the zone effect is being executed, and the end timing of the zone (for example, the display change high probability zone) is determined from the current fluctuation pattern, the timer value for measuring the fluctuation time, and the like. If it is, it is determined whether or not it is "A2", and if it is a chance zone, it is at the end of the target fluctuation). If it is not the end timing of the zone effect (step 57AKS011; No), the specific display process ends.

If it is the end timing of the zone (step 57AKS011; Yes), the control for ending the zone effect is executed (step 57AKS012), and the specific display process is ended. In step 57AKS012, control such as deleting the image corresponding to the zone from the image display device 5 may be executed.

By executing the specific display process as described above by the effect control CPU 120, the effect of the pending change notice and the zone effect as shown in FIG. 12-1 is realized.

(Modification example of feature part 57AK)
The feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the zone effect is controlled by either the display change high probability zone or the chance zone, but the display change high probability zone may be shifted to the chance zone. For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-7 (A), when the display change high probability zone is controlled, the display change high probability zone is shown as shown in FIGS. 12-7 (B) and 12-7 (C). The zone display 57AK003 indicating that it is a chance zone may be displayed to indicate that it is a chance zone, and the zone display 57AK005 may be displayed to shift to the chance zone. The timing of transition from the display change high probability zone to the chance zone may be arbitrary, but for example, during the variable display (variable display of the target of the pending change notice) corresponding to the start prize that triggered the transition of the display change high probability zone. , When the display mode of the specific display reaches a predetermined stage or higher (for example, e or higher). By doing so, the display mode of the specific display is easy to change and it is easy to taste the successful experience. Since the display change high probability zone shifts to the chance zone where the jackpot reliability is extremely high, the variation of the production increases and the interest of the game becomes more interesting. improves. In addition, the display change high probability zone may be shifted from the chance zone. Further, the zone may be shifted a plurality of times during one zone production. For example, after shifting to the chance zone, the display mode may shift to the display change high probability zone at the timing when the display mode of the specific display changes, and then shift to the chance zone again.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (B)', the zone display 57AK003 indicating that the display change is a high probability zone and the zone display 57AK005 indicating that the display change is a chance zone are both displayed in two zones. It may be possible to migrate in parallel. By doing so, it is possible to notify that the display mode of the specific display is likely to change and that the jackpot reliability is high, as well as the various effects.

In the above embodiment, the process of changing the display mode of the specific display (the effect mode of the pending change notice) is determined by selecting and determining the display change pattern, but the determination method is arbitrary, for example. The display mode of the specific display at each change timing may be individually determined each time. Further, in the above embodiment, the shift time of the hold display is the change timing, but the change timing is not limited to this, and the change timing of the display mode of the hold display may be any timing during the variable display.

Further, in the above embodiment, when a plurality of specific displays are displayed, it is restricted that when the hold change notice is executed for one specific display, the hold change notice for the other specific display is executed. Not. Therefore, after the display mode of one specific display is changed, the display mode of another specific display (for example, the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning prize) may change. On the other hand, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the execution of the pending change notice may be restricted for the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning prize. This makes it possible to prevent the specific display and the variable display that should be noted in the display change high probability zone from becoming difficult to understand. In this case, the display mode does not change for the specific display newly displayed in the display change high probability zone after the display change high probability zone ends. On the other hand, the display mode may be further changed for the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone (that is, the specific display that triggered the zone transition). Therefore, it can be said that the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone is more likely to change the display mode than the specific display whose display mode has not changed during the display change high probability zone.

Even after the display change high probability zone (specific effect) is completed, the specific display in which the display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone is different from the specific display in which the display mode has not changed in the display change high probability zone. In addition to the fact that the display mode is likely to change, the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone changes more frequently, and the display mode does not change during the display change high probability zone. The specific display does not change at all, and the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone may change. In addition, the specific display in which the display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone also includes a tendency that the display mode changes more frequently than the specific display in which the display mode does not change in the display change high probability zone.

Display change In the high probability zone, the display mode of a plurality of specific displays may be changed. For example, it may be difficult to tell which is the target by changing the specific display other than the specific display (target specific display) corresponding to the start prize that triggered the transition to the high probability zone of display change to "blue". .. At that time, a hold change notice in which a plurality of specific displays change at the same time, or a change suggestion effect suggesting that a plurality of specific displays change at the same time (for example, an effect is applied to the entire hold display area or an image acts on the effect). May be executed. In this case, a plurality of specific display changes may be successful, or only one may be changed. Further, the pending change notice in which a plurality of specific displays change at the same time may be executed only in the display change high probability zone, or may be executed in a normal state not in another zone or zone production. Good.

In the above embodiment, there is only one type of display change high probability zone, but there may be a plurality of types of display change high probability zones. For example, a weak display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the normal state and a strong display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than the weak display change high probability zone are provided. May be. In this case, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be changed to indicate which display change high probability zone. For example, the blue zone display 57AK003 may be used in the weak display change high probability zone, and the red zone display 57AK003 may be used in the strong display change high probability zone. Then, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong display change high probability zone. When shifting from the weak display change high probability zone to the strong display change high probability zone, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be changed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that each is a display change high probability zone, and it is possible to notify that the degree of expectation has changed. Further, as the types of the display change high probability zone, there may be a display change high probability zone in which the probability that the specific display changes is high, and a display change high probability zone in which the number of times the specific display changes is likely to increase.

When a plurality of types of display change high probability zones are provided, it may be possible to shift between each display change high probability zone and the chance zone. For example, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong display change high probability zone, and then the chance zone may be shifted. Further, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the chance zone, and then the strong display change high probability zone may be shifted. Further, the zone may be restricted not to shift in a specific route, or an effect of branching the route (an effect indicating which zone to shift to) may be executed.

In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect is such that the star image 57AK004 acts on the specific display, but the effect mode of the change suggestion effect is not limited to this, and a predetermined image such as a character image is displayed. It may be such that the display mode of the specific display changes depending on the sound, the operation of the lamp, the movable body, or the like. Further, the effect mode (effect device) of the change suggestion effect may be different depending on whether or not the zone is being produced and which zone it is.

In the above embodiment, the zone displays 57AK003 and 57AK005 notify that the zone effect is being executed and which zone is controlled, but the background and sound in the image display device 5 The zone may be notified by the operation of a lamp or a movable body. Further, the background image may be greatly different depending on the zone, the zone type may be displayed in the display area of the specific display (active display area 57AK001, hold display area 57AK002), or the display mode and color of the display area of the specific display may be displayed. May be different depending on the zone.

Further, a sub display device (sub liquid crystal) different from the image display device 5 is provided to display the zone type on the sub liquid crystal, or the sub liquid crystal is movable to notify the zone type according to the operation and position of the sub liquid crystal. You may. Further, the display position, display size, and animation mode (update speed, operation speed, operation direction, etc.) of the specific display may be different depending on the type of zone. The zone notification methods as described above may be any one or may be arbitrarily combined.

A part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example according to the feature portion 57AK may be appropriately combined. Further, the invention relating to the feature portion 57AK and the invention relating to another feature portion may be appropriately combined.

For example, by combining the invention of the feature unit 57AK with the invention of the feature units 53AK and 54AK, the appearance rate and reliability of the pre-reading notice effect (pending change notice, zone effect) of the present application are the same or omitted regardless of the set value. The execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect may be adjusted according to the set value so as to be within the same range.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 57AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 57AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, hold display, active display) corresponding to variable display.
A change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) that changes the display mode of the specific display.
It is provided with a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone effect of a display change high probability zone).
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. The mode is easily changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A change suggestion effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. 12-1 (C) or the like) suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes between when the specific effect is executed and when the specific effect is not executed. The execution rate of the image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be different (for example, the change suggestion effect may be executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in the display mode than the specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed. For example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
A special effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a zone effect of a chance zone) different from the specific effect is provided.
The display mode of the specific display may be changed more easily when the specific effect is executed than when the special effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
A special effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a zone effect of a chance zone) different from the specific effect is provided.
When the special effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific effect is executed.
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (see, for example, FIG. 12-7).
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 4A, 4B special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 6A winning ball device, 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker , 9 Game effect lamp, 10 General winning openings, 11 Main board, 12
Production control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay board, 20 ordinary symbol display, 21 gate switch, 22A, 22B start port switch, 23 count switch, 30 ball hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push Button, 32 movable body, 100 game control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104,124 random number circuit, 105,125 I / O, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can be set to any of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player.
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled is provided.
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means can execute a special suggestion effect for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled.
The execution rate of the special suggestion effect varies depending on the set value.
further,
A change effect execution means that changes the display mode of a specific display,
Equipped with a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect,
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. A game machine characterized in that its mode is easily changed.

Images